Home

BreezeMAX Micro BST, Ver.4.2 TDD - System Manual

1. Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Admin Status 1 Disabled Yes 2 Enabled Services Service Profiles Parameters Service Profile Name 1 to 32 printable characters Yes Service Type Applicable only for new Service Profiles Yes Add 1 L2 2 PPPoE 3 Voice 4 Managed VoIP VLAN Transparency Mode 1 Off Yes 2 On VPLID 0 4094 or null for No VPL ID Yes Priority Marking Mode 1 Transparent Yes 2 802 1p 3 DSCP Priority Marking Value 802 1p 0 7 Yes DSCP 0 63 Forwarding Rule A Forwarding Rule Name 1 to 32 Yes printable characters that exists in the database Priority Classifier A Priority Classifier Name 1 to 32 Yes printable characters that exists in the database Maximum Number of Voice Calls 0 50 Yes Voice Domain A Voice Domain Name 1 to 32 Yes printable characters that exists in the database Services Forwarding Rule Parameters Forwarding Rule Name 1 to 32 printable characters Yes 216 Operation and Administration Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Service Type Applicable only for new Service Profiles Add 1 L2 2 PPPoE 3 Voice 4 Managed Voice Yes Unicast Relaying Applicable only for L2 and Managed VoIP Service types 1 Disabled 2 Enabled Yes Broadcast Relaying A
2. Unit Dimensions cm Weight kg Micro Base Station IDU 1U ETSI type shelf 1U x 44 4 x 27 2 3 AU ODU HP excluding 2 3 GHz WCS models 32 9 x 15 7 x 16 9 9 6 1 AU ODU HP 2 3 GHz WCS models 32 9 x 15 7 x 20 9 8 6 GPS Adapter 15 7 x 14 6 x 3 17 0 4 Outdoor GPS Receiver Tubular enclosure 15 5 D x 12 7 H 0 363 Indoor GPS Receiver 1U x 30 8 x 21 3 1 4 1U 44 45 mm 1 75 1 5 10 2 Electrical Table 1 11 Electrical Specifications Micro Base Station Equipment Unit Details Power Source 40 5 to 60 VDC Power Consumption excluding ODUs 53W typical 64W maximum AU ODU HP 2 x GHz Tx DL 89W maximum 75W typical Rx UL 15W maximum 9W typical AU ODU HP 3 x GHz Tx DL 90W maximum 62W typical Rx UL 20W maximum 14W typical GPS Adapter 12 VDC from the NPU 1 2W maximum Indoor GPS Receiver Power Source 36 to 72 VDC Power Dissipation 20W maximum 12W typical Outdoor GPS Receiver 12 VDC from the uBST via the GPS Adapter 6W maximum 22 System Description Specifications 1 5 10 3 Connectors Table 1 12 Connectors Micro Base Station Equipment Connector Connector Description Micro Base Station IDU DC IN on rear panel 3 pin D Type male Amphenol P N 17TWA3W3PR157 DATA 10 100Base T RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDS Cable connection to a PC Crossed Cable connection to a hub Straight MGMT 10 100Base T RJ 45 with 2 em
3. 198 Operation and Administration Services Menu Table 4 9 Pre Configured Data Service Profiles Name Service Type VPL ID Forwarding Rule Priority Classifier Gold Teleworking L2 12 Gold Teleworking Gold Asymmetric Silver Teleworking L2 13 Silver Teleworking Silver Asymmetric Bronze Teleworking L2 14 Bronze Teleworking Bronze Asymmetric Gold LAN to LAN L2 15 Gold LAN to LAN Gold Symmetric Silver LAN to LAN L2 16 Silver LAN to LAN Silver Symmetric Bronze LAN to LAN L2 17 Bronze LAN to LAN Bronze Symmetric In all pre configured Data Service Profiles the Priority Marking Mode is set to Transparent and the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is 0 VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation taking into account the considerations described in Section 4 10 1 5 As Internet Access L2 is the recommended Default Data Service Profile a VPL ID None is used to ensure availability of basic data services in Quick Mode Table 4 10 Pre Configured Forwarding Rules for Data Service Name Service Unicast Broadcast Unknown Multicast Type relaying Relaying forwarding QoS Policy Internet Access L2 L2 Disable Disable Forward BE 750 Internet Access PPPoE PPPoE Disable hard Disable hard Forward hard BE 750 coded coded coded Gold Teleworking L2 D
4. A change in the Base Station ID is applied only after reset Base Station ID Mask The Base Station ID Mask together with the Base station ID define the AU s Micro Base Station s that can synchronize with the SU The Base Station ID Mask consists of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each where the range of each group is 0 to 255 The first 3 groups form the mask for the Operator ID The next 2 groups form the mask for the Cell ID and the last group forms the mask for the Sector ID A change in the Base Station ID Mask is applied only after reset Phy Standard FDD Parameters The SU Phy menu enables viewing updating the Phy parameters for Standard operation mode These parameters do not affect the operation of the unit when using Advanced Si operation mode For more details refer to Section 4 9 6 3 2 Bandwidth MHz The frequency bandwidth used by the radio A change in the Bandwidth parameter will take effect only after resetting the SU The available options are 1 1 75 MHz 2 3 5 MHz 3 5 MHz BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 143 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 6 3 3 2 4 9 6 3 4 4 9 6 3 4 1 4 9 6 3 4 2 144 4 7 MHz 5 10 MHz A trial to configure a bandwidth that is not supported by the SU will be rejected Uplink Tx Frequency MHz The Uplink Tx Frequency is the frequency used in the uplink from SU to AU Micro Base Station A change in the Uplink Frequency param
5. In Band Indoor Unit Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE pronounced I triple E is an organization composed of engineers scientists and students The IEEE is best known for developing standards for the computer and electronics industry In particular the IEEE 802 standards for local area networks are widely followed A QoS method A three bit value that can be placed inside an 802 1Q frame tag Also known as WIMAX A group of broadband wireless communications standards for metropolitan area networks MANs developed by a working group of the IEEE 802 16e also known as 802 16 2005 is an IEEE standard addressing mobility of wireless broadband WiMax IEEE 802 166 is sometimes called Mobile WiMAX after the WiMAX forum for interoperability 802 16e based on an existing WiMAX standard 802 16a adds WiMAX mobility in the 2 to 6 GHz licensed bands 802 16e allows for fixed wireless and mobile Non Line of Sight NLOS applications primarily by enhancing the OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access The IEEE 802 1Q standard defines the operation of VLAN Bridges that permit the definition operation and administration of Virtual LAN topologies within a Bridged LAN infrastructure The 802 1Q specification establishes a standard method for inserting VLAN membership information into Ethernet frames A tag field containing VLAN and or 802 1p priority information can be inserted into an Ethernet frame carr
6. QAM16 1 2 QAM16 3 4 QAM64 2 3 o NIOJ a AJ OOJ N QAM64 3 4 NOTE x Rate 2 BPSK 3 4 is not applicable to systems operating in TDD mode The Multirate menu enables viewing updating the following parameters BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 127 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 4 1 x 4 8 4 2 4 8 4 3 128 Multirate Enable Disable The Multirate Enable Disable parameter controls whether the multirate algorithm should be used to determine current optimal rates in both the uplinks and the downlinks The default is Enable NOTE The multirate algorithm should always be enabled The option to disable it is available to enable using a fixed rate to support certain tests After each reset the uBST boots with the multirate enabled disregarding its status before the device was reset Uplink Basic Rate The Uplink Basic Rate is the minimum rate to be used by the Multirate algorithm in all uplinks This is also the rate to be used by SUs for non scheduled transmissions such as during the contention period The Uplink Basic Rate is also the initial rate to be used by the algorithm for each new SU that joins the cell when the Multirate algorithm is enabled The available options are listed in Table 4 4 The default rate is the lowest rate BPSK 1 2 rate 1 Minimum Number of Sub Channels The system supports Sub Channelization OFDMA in the uplink
7. Unknown Forwarding Policy is applicable only to L2 and Managed VoIP Forwarding Rules In all PPPoE Forwarding Rules it is set to Reject In all Voice Forwarding Rules it is set to Forward Multicast QoS Profile The Multicast QoS Profile is the QoS Profile to be used for mulicast and broadcast messages Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 4 5 7 4 10 4 6 4 10 4 6 1 4 10 4 6 2 4 10 4 6 3 The QoS Profile must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the QoS Profile menu Forwarding Rule Class A read only parameter available only in Show menu Currently the Class of all Forwarding Rules is Local Priority Classifiers L2 Managed VolP and PPPoE Service Type The Priority Classifier defines the QoS Profiles to be allocated to users sessions differentiated by DSCP or 802 1p priority classifiers Priority Classifiers are not applicable to Voice Service Profiles Each Priority Classifier can define up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink QoS profiles NOTE DSCP based Priority Classifiers are applicable only to IP or ARP traffic It is not applicable to PPPoE and other Ethernet type traffic If a Priority Classifier is not applicable for a certain traffic e g DSCP based profile with PPPoE traffic or 802 1p based profile with traffic that do not use VLAN tags no prioritization scheme will be in effect and quality of service will be determined by the first QoS Profile in the a
8. E CIR 6 Kbps E CT Short BE QoS for Data As stated the recommended QoS Profile for Data is BE 64 with the following parameters E MIR 64 Kbps E CT Short BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 233 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VolP Gateways B 4 B 4 1 B 4 2 B 4 3 B 4 4 234 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 Service Profile Service Characteristics E G 711 codec 20msec sample interval E 1POTS E No Fax E Priority marking behind the SU is not used All VoIP related traffic is classified onto a single Continuous Grant CG connection E Multiple media streams to support Call Waiting If the traffic exceeds the BW allocated to the CG connection the SU may request to double the allocated BW RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth for a G 711 call 64 Kbps codec bit rate with RTP and 160 bytes of voice payload is Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 160 bytes 218 bytes Total packet size bits 218 bytes 8 bits per byte 1744 bits PPS 64 Kbps codec bit rate 1280 bits 50 pps Note 1280 bits 160 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call total packet size 1744 bits 50 pps 87 2Kbps RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 87 2 Kbps approximately 8 7 Kbps QoS Profile The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is approximately 88 Kbps To
9. J Serial Number Main Card HW Revision Main Card HW Configuration IF Card HW Configuration Boot Version Temperature Celsius Cumulative Power On Time hours The cumulative power on time of the IDU since first power up oO Diversity Mode Status Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu HM SW Versions Main SW File Main SW Version Shadow SW File Shadow SW Version Running From Main or Shadow Boot SW Version For more details refer to Section 4 5 2 4 E General Parameters Device Name Device Location Operator ID Cell ID ATPC Enable Disable Optimal Uplink RSSI dBm Redundant CPLD Version For details refer to Section 4 5 3 1 E Management Port Configuration Management Port MAC Address Management Port IP Address Management Port Subnet Mask Management Port Gateway Management Port Dest Subnet Management Port Auto Negotiation 99999569 Management Port Speed and Duplex Management Port Dest Subnet Mask BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 70 Management Port Link Status Up or Down Management Port Management Traffic Enabled Disabled For details refer toSection 4 5 3 2 E Data Port Configuration Ke ta Data Port MAC Address Data Port IP Address Data Port Subnet Mask Data Port Gateway Data Port Management V
10. NOTE A License Value of Grace for Number of CPEs license License ID CPE indicates that the number of CPEs served by a Micro Base Station with no CPE license has exceeded 20 A message indicating this event is displayed and a corresponding trap is sent A grace period of 30 days is granted to the Micro Base Station starting with the registration of the 21st CPE During this grace period it can serve more 20 CPEs When the grace period expires the unit will be able to serve a maximum of 20 CPEs and will reject any additional CPE that will try to associate with it Show Temporary Grace Licenses and Show Grace Licenses The aggregate uplink and downlink MIR in all the services allocated to an L model CPE should not exceed 2 Mbps If the aggregate MIR in the services assigned to such a CPE exceeds this limit the Network Service Provider has a 30 days grace period During the grace period the assigned services are provided to the CPE At any time during the 30 days grace period the Network Service Operator can load to the CPE the required permanent license for unlimited bandwidth If a license was not loaded during this grace period the following will happen E During the first 3 days defined as a temporary grace period the Network Service Provider may change the services assigned to the CPE so that the aggregate MIR is no longer above 2 Mbps The CPE will be removed from the list of Temporary Grace Licenses and will return to its prev
11. Show Summary Select this option to view summary information and main details for all connected and pre configured SUs E For each SU the following information is displayed MAC Address User Name SU Type gt v Vv Y VY v V WV CPE first generation CPE Not applicable in TDD systems CPE PRO CPR PRO L CPE PRO2 CPE PRO2 L CPE SI CPE SI L not applicable in current release CPE SI2 Operation and Administration SU Menu gt CPE SI2 L not applicable in current release CPE PRO CPE PRO L CPE SI and CPE SI L use first generation Intel s Pro Wireless 5116 WiMAX chip CPE PRO2 CPE PRO2 L CPE SI2 and CPE SI2 L use second generation IEEE 802 16e ready WiMAX chip The L suffix indicates that the SU was supplied with limited capabilities limited bandwidth SU Status Permanent or Temporary SUID an ID allocated to each SU by the connected uBST Registration Status In Service Out Of Service oo 9 Configured SW File Name The SW File configured in the uBST together with the Configured Action Configured SW Version The SW Version of the SW File configured in the uBST Configured Action The operation to be performed with the Configured SW File when the SU is connected as well as after each reset Null do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main SW Download Status The status of the last SW download operation or None SU
12. The Trap Configuration menu enables viewing current parameters of all traps and updating the parameters of a selected trap It also enables viewing traps with modified parameters different from the default and restoring the configuration of all modified traps to their default values The available options are E Show Trap Status E Admin Status E Severity E Suppression Interval Show Traps Status Select this option to view a list of all traps and their parameters For each trap the following details are displayed E Trap ID E Name E Admin Status the default Admin Status for all traps is Enabled E Default Severity HM Current Severity E Suppression Interval in seconds The default Suppression Interval is 0 which means no suppression BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 95 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 4 4 2 4 5 4 4 3 4 5 4 4 4 96 Admin Status The Admin Status menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Admin Status Disabled updating the Admin Status of a selected trap and restoring the Admin Status of all traps to the default Enabled status The Admin Status menu includes the following options E Show Disabled Traps List Displays all traps with Admin Status Disabled the default Admin Status for all traps is Enabled E Update Enables modifying the Admin Status of a selected trap E Restore Defaults Enables restoring the Admin Status of all traps to Enable Severit
13. The location name consists of up to 255 printable characters The default Device Location is a null string empty ATPC BreezeMAX employs an Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC algorithm to dynamically adapt the transmit power of each SU so that it is received by the AU ODU at an optimal level ATPC is required to minimize the interference caused by a strong signal of an SU from one sector to other SU units in another sector The ATPC algorithm will cause the SU to transmit a power level that minimizes the interference to other SU units while maintaining a sufficient receiving power BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 77 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 1 3 1 Ed 4 5 3 1 3 2 78 level The algorithm is managed by the Micro Base Station and optimal values are calculated separately for each SU based on the actual level at which it is received by the AU ODU MAP messages transmitted to the SUs include information on the estimated power level change required to achieve optimal transmit power level When several SUs transmit simultaneously each one increases the total level of noise If a strong SU transmits simultaneously with a very weak SU the noise induced by the strong one may cause the SNR of the weak SU to be too low In order to avoid this all SUs should not be too strong their RSSI at the AU ODU should be not be higher than a nominal RSSI typically 74 d
14. intended to allow more robust data service Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access It s a logical extension of OFDM and a modulation multiple access technique OFDMA divides a signal into sub channels i e groups of carriers with each sub channel or several sub channels being allocated to a different subscriber Out Of Band Password Authentication Protocol A means of authenticating passwords which is defined in RFC 1334 PAP uses a two way handshaking procedure The validity of the password is checked at login BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 247 Glossary PER PHY POTS PPPoE QAM QoS QPSK RADIUS 248 Packet Error Rate In a digital transmission PER is the percentage of packets with errors divided by the total number of packets that have been transmitted received or processed over a given time period PHYsical Layer The physical or lowest layer of the OSI Network Model In a wireless network the PHY defines parameters such as data rates modulation method signaling parameters transmitter receiver synchronization etc Within an actual radio implementation the PHY corresponds to the radio front end and baseband signal processing sections Plain Old Telephone System A basic analog telephone equipment Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE relies on two widely accepted standards PPP and Ethernet PPPoE is a specification for connecting the users on an Etherne
15. 146 Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex SU 146 Ethertype L2 Filtering Rule 186 External 16MHz Clock 81 External 1PPS Clock 81 F File Loading Procedure 223 Filtering Rules Menu 185 First Name 168 Forwarding Rule Broadcast Relaying 180 Menu 179 Multicast QoS Profile 180 Name 179 Service Type 179 Unicast Relaying 180 Unknown Forwarding Policy 180 Forwarding Rule Class 181 Forwarding Rule Name 179 Forwarding Rules Definition 156 Frequency Bands File 119 Frequency Bands Groups 119 Frequency Scanning Parameters 150 From Network Filtering 187 From Wireless Filtering 187 G Gateway Data Port 90 Management Port 87 General Micro Base Station Parameters 77 General Service Parameters Default L2 Voice Service Profile 167 Default PPPoE Service Profile 167 Menu 167 Service Mode 167 Show 167 Update 167 Gold LAN to LAN Pre Configured Profile 198 Gold Teleworking Pre Configured Profile 198 GPS Adapter Connectors 44 Installation 42 LEDs 44 GPS Info 85 GPS Protocol 83 GPS Supported 83 Grace Licenses 101 H Hold Over Passed Timeout 85 Hybrid VLAN Mode 170 I IDU Type 131 IF Cables 29 Installation 27 AU ODU 28 GPS Adapter 42 Micro Base Station 36 Installer Password Micro Base Station 72 SU 146 Interface Filtering Active Rule Type 188 Admin Status 188 Default Action 188 From Network Filtering 187 From Wireless Filtering 187 L2 Filtering Rules List 1
16. 2300 2360 MHz 125 KHz 2307 5 13 2 5A 2 5GHz 6 2496 2602 MHz 125 KHz 2592 5 14 2 5B 2 5GHz 6 2590 2690 MHz 125 KHz 2592 5 15 3 4a 3 5GHz TDD 7 3399 5 3455 MHz 125 KHz 3446 75 16 3 4b 3 5GHz TDD 7 3445 3500 MHz 125 KHz 3446 75 17 3 5a TDD 3 5GHz TDD 7 3500 3555 MHz 125 KHz 3551 75 18 3 5b TDD 3 5GHz TDD 7 3545 3600 MHz 125 KHz 3551 75 19 3 3a 3 3GHz TDD 8 3300 3355 MHz 125 KHz 3350 20 3 3b 3 3GHz TDD 8 3345 3400 MHz 125 KHz 3350 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 119 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 3 Frequency Bands ID Frequency Group ID Frequency Range Resolution Default Band Frequency MHz 21 5 2 5 2GHz TDD 9 5150 5350 MHz 500 KHz 5155 Note that the Frequency Bands File includes additional Frequency Bands for systems that support FDD Duplex Mode and are not applicable to the current release This mechanism allows adding new frequency bands without modifying the software by simply loading a new Frequency Bands File when the supporting hardware becomes available The file will be either a part of the Micro Base Station s software or loaded later to the Micro Base Station using an updated file obtained from Alvarion 120 Operation and Administration Access Parameters Menu 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 1 1 4 8 1 2 Access Parameters Menu The Access Parameters menu enables viewing and up
17. Enabled Select Use this option and select an already defined ODU to open the ODU menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected ODU The selected ODU menu includes the following options Show Select this option to view the current value selected option of applicable parameters In addition some general status information is displayed as follows ID Associated Radio Cluster Configured Tx Power ODU Configured Band Associated Channel if any Admin Status Oper Status applicable only for an associated ODU HCO8 Version applicable only for an associated ODU CPLD Version applicable only for an associated ODU Card Serial Number applicable only for an associated ODU Temperature Celsius applicable only for an associated ODU HW Revision applicable only for an associated ODU HW Configuration Description applicable only for an associated ODU Max Tx Power The maximum Tx Power supported by the ODU This read only parameter sets the upper limit for the Tx Power parameter applicable only for an associated ODU Operation and Administration ODU Menu 4 7 2 2 4 7 2 3 4 7 3 4 7 4 4 7 4 1 4 7 4 2 4 7 4 3 E Actual Tx Power The actual Tx power that may differ from the Configured Tx Power If the configured value is below the minimum supported by the ODU the actual power will be set to the minimum supported by the unit If the configured value is above the m
18. LAN LED LOS LVDS uBST MAC MAC Address MAN MCS MD5 MIB Local area Network A computer network limited to a small geographical area such as a single building The network typically links PCs as well as shared resources such as printers Light Emitting Diode Line Of Sight A condition where a signal travels over the air directly from a wireless transmitter to a wireless receiver without passing an obstruction Low Voltage Differential Signaling A low noise low power low amplitude method for high speed gigabits per second data transmission over copper wire Micro Base Station Media Access Control The lower of the two sub layers of the data link layer defined by the IEEE The MAC sub layer handles access to shared media such as whether token passing or contention will be used Standardized data link layer address that is required for every port or device that connects to a LAN Other devices in the network use these addresses to locate specific ports in the network and to create and update routing tables and data structures MAC addresses are 6bytes long and are controlled by the IEEE Metropolitan Area Network A data network designed for a town or city In terms of geographic breadth MANs are larger than local area networks LANs but smaller than wide area networks WANs Multipoint Communications Systems Applications licensed at 2500 MHz in Canada A wide variety of applications are possib
19. Pursuant to the WEEE EU Directive electronic and electrical waste must not be disposed of with unsorted waste Please contact your local recycling authority for disposal of this product BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Legal Rights Important Notice This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting authorized users of the respective Alvarion products No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license Information in this document is subject to change without notice Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty u
20. QoS Profile Class 185 QoS Profile Name 184 QoS Type 184 Quick Service Mode 160 quickynikinyoky 160 R Radio Cluster Add 113 ID 113 Location 113 Menu 112 Name 113 Parameters 113 Sector Beam Width 114 Sector Heading 113 Select 112 Show Summary 112 Radio Parameters Advanced Si 149 RADIUS Defining Services 197 RADIUS General Parameters 104 RADIUS Parameters 102 Read Community Authorized Manager 92 Real Time RT QoS Profile 183 Registration Parameters su 142 Reset Unit Micro Base Station 72 su 139 Retry Interval 105 RT 183 Run from Shadow Micro Base Station 74 su 140 S Sample Interval 185 Scanning Main Step 152 Sector Beam Width 114 Sector Heading 113 Sector ID 121 Select Authorized Manager 92 Channel 125 ODU 116 Radio Cluster 112 Select by MAC Address SU 134 Select by Name SU 134 Select Link Speed and Duplex BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 261 Index Data Port 90 Management Port 88 Select Server Accounting 110 Authentication 107 Send Traps Authorized Manager 92 Server Status Accounting 110 Authentication 107 Service Access VLAN 171 Admin Status 171 Best Effort 183 Continuous Grant 183 Definition 156 General Parameters 167 Generic VolP non DRAP based 159 Hybrid VLAN Mode 170 L2 157 Menu 168 Name 169 Non Real Time 183 Operation Status 171 Performance 171 PPPoE 157 Re
21. Scanning Intermediate Steps Number Effect on scanned frequencies set included None 0 Only Main Frequencies Start Frequency N Main Step as defined above are included in the set 150 Operation and Administration SU Menu Table 4 5 Scanning Intermediate Steps Number included Effect on scanned frequencies set 1 Start Frequency is added to the set of Main Frequencies All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 125 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 250 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 375 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 500 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 625 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 750 KHz are added to the scanning set O NS I OD A AJ wy dv For a bandwidth of 3 5 MHz All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 875 KHz are added to the scanning set For a bandwidth of 5 MHz All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 1250 KHz are added to the scanning set For example the Intermediate Steps list 1 2 5 means that the scanned frequencies are Start Frequency Start Frequ
22. Services are provided by a RADIUS Authentication Server A Temporary Service may also be granted by the Micro Base Station based on the Default Service Profiles when a RADIUS server is not available or when the SU is rejected by the RADIUS server provided the SU uses the quick User Password quickynikinyoky A Temporary Service is given a default name of lt SU Name gt lt Number gt A Temporary Service cannot be defined deleted or edited locally using either the Monitor program or SNMP The Services menu enables viewing all Services defining new permanent Services editing details of previously defined permanent Services and removing permanent Services from the database Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 4 3 1 4 10 4 3 1 1 NOTE The proper process of removing a Service is 1 Disable the Service set the Admin Status to Disable 2 Delete the Service If the Service is not disabled prior to being the deleted VLAN ID included in the VLAN List of the deleted Service may still be used by other Services to the same SU that use the same Forwarding Rule as the deleted Service The Services database in the uBST can hold up to 1023 Services The Services menu also enables viewing and resetting the Service counters Service Parameters The Service s parameters are Name A Service Name consists of 1 to 32 printable characters A temporary Service is given a default name of lt SU MAC Add
23. This list will replace the current list of discrete frequencies E Add Frequency Enter one frequency to be added to the current list of discrete frequencies E Delete Frequency Enter one frequency to be removed from the current list of discrete frequencies HM Delete All Select this option to delete the entire list of discrete frequencies Update Scanning Table Select this option to update the frequency scanning table in run time without resetting the unit Force Full Scanning Select this option to initiate a full scanning process Performance Monitoring The Performance Monitoring sub menu provides the following options E Ports Counters E Burst Error Rate Counters SU Ports Counters The SU Ports Counters menu enables viewing or resetting the Ethernet and Wireless ports counters The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The counters are reset each time the SU is reset or upon activating the Reset Counters option The displayed counters include E Ethernet Port Counters Data Bytes Received The total number of data bytes received from the Ethernet link Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Rx The number of bytes discarded when a packet received from the Ethernet port is not forwarded to the Wireless port due to bridging or classification considerations BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System
24. Total packet size 624 bits 50 pps 31 2 Kbps Voice RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 31 2 Kbps is 3 12 Kbps T 38 14 400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth with a 20 msec sample interval is as follows BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 729 Service Profile Budal B 3 6 B 3 6 1 B 3 6 2 B 3 6 3 Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 36 bytes 94 bytes Total packet size bits 94bytes 8 bits per byte 752 bits PPS 14 4 Kbps bit rate 288 bits 50 pps Note 288 bits 36 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call total packet size 752bits 50 pps 37 6 Kbps Since Fax BW is higher than Voice BW the Fax BW requirement mandates the CG connection s attributes This is true for all G 729 and G 723 codecs FAX RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 37 6 Kbps is 3 76 Kbps QoS Profiles CG QoS for RTP traffic The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 37 6 Kbps equivalent to a Packet Size of 752 bits or 94 bytes Thus the CG 38 QoS Profile parameters are E Packet Size 117 bytes E Sample Interval 20 msec RT QoS for RTCP and VoIP Signaling The required bandwidth is 5 76 Kbps 3 76 Kbps for Fax RTCP plus 2 Kbps for VoIP Signaling We round it up to 6 Kbps Thus the required RT 6 QoS Profile parameters are
25. VoIP 1V Pre Configured Profile 198 VoIP 2V Pre Configured Profile 198 VPL ID 175 W Wireless Port Counters Micro Base Station 98 Write Community Authorized Manager 92 264 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual
26. accommodate for other traffic types such as RTCP up to 8 7 Kbps Voice Signaling up to 2 Kbps and Data Device Management we allocate to it a total bandwidth of 108 Kbps equivalent to a Packet Size of 2160 bits or 270 bytes The SU may request twice this BW so it will be allocated with up to approximately BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 1 POTS Basic VolP G 711 Service Profile 216 Kbps This is assumed to be sufficient for all traffic scenarios including Call Waiting Thus the CG 108 QoS Profile parameters are E Packet Size 270 bytes E Sample Interval 20 msec BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 235 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B 5 B 5 1 Bidet B 5 3 B 5 4 236 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 711 Service Profile Service Characteristics M G 729 codec 20msec sample interval E 1 POTS E T 38 Fax E DSCP priority marking behind the SU is used with the following values 63 RTP traffic 26 RTCP and VolP traffic 0 Data traffic E Single media stream to support Call Waiting Voice RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth for a G 711 call 64 Kbps codec bit rate with RTP and 160 bytes of voice payload is Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 160 bytes 218 bytes Total packet size bits 218 bytes 8 bits per byte 1744 bits PPS 64 Kbps codec bi
27. group to another transparent to end users Network Address Port Translation or NAPT is a method by which many network addresses and their TCP UDP ports are translated into a single network address and its TCP UDP ports Together these two operations referred to as traditional NAT provide a mechanism to connect a realm with private addresses to an external realm with globally unique registered addresses Network Interface Card An expansion board you insert into a computer or a built in component that enables the computer to connect to a network Most NICs are designed for a particular type of network protocol and media although some can serve multiple networks Network Interface Unit Non Line Of Sight A condition where a signal from a wireless transmitter passes several obstructions before arriving at a wireless receiver The signal may be reflected refracted diffracted absorbed or scattered These create multiple signals that will arrive ata receiver at different times from different paths and with different strength Consequently wireless systems developed for NLOS environment have to incorporate a number of techniques to overcome this problem and that make the systems more complex than those for LOS But NLOS capable systems simplify network planning and site acquisition BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Glossary NMS NOC NPU NRT OA amp M ODU OFDM OFDMA OOB PAP Network Manageme
28. 1 2 Figure 1 4 4 sectors configuration frequency reuse 1 2 2d Order Diversity Multiple channel configuration with second order diversity allows coverage of one sector with space diversity by a single Micro Base Station and two ODUs connected to channels 1 and 2 The same frequency and transmit power are set for both ODUs The two ODUs served by the same Micro Base Station share a common MAC and modem BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 7 Chapter 1 System Description 1 2 3 4 1 2 4 Fl BST Figure 1 5 One sector configuration with second order diversity 4 Order Diversity Multiple channel configuration with fourth order diversity allows a single sector coverage by the Micro Base Station with 4 ODUs In each sector both space and polarization diversities are implemented using dual polarization slant antennas The channels are paired channels 1 and 2 form one pair channels 3 and 4 form the second pair The two ODUs connected to each pair are connected to the same dual polarization antenna The same frequency and transmit power are set for all four ODUs All ODUs served by the same Micro Base Station share a common MAC and modem Channd 2 Channd 3 ea F1 Figure 1 6 One sector configuration with fourth order diversity GPS GPS is used to synchronize the air link frames of Intra site and Inter site located Base Stations to ensure that in all sectors the air frame will
29. 117 ID 117 Menu 115 Parameters 117 Select 116 Show 116 Show Summary 115 Tx Power 118 Update 117 Operation Status Accounting 109 Authentication Server 106 Service 171 Operator ID 79 Optimal Uplink RSSI 78 Organization Name 142 P Packet Size 185 Password Defaults Micro Base Station 72 Micro Base Station 72 Performance Service 171 Performance Monitoring Micro Base Station 97 SU 153 Permanent 160 Phy Standard FDD Parameters SU 143 Phy Parameters Micro Base Station 123 Port L3 L4 Filtering Rule 187 Port Direction L3 L4 Filtering Rule 187 Ports Counters Micro Base Station 97 Power Cable Micro Base Station 38 Power Requirements 39 PPPoE Service 157 260 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Index Preferred BST AU ID 149 Preferred BST AU ID Mask 149 Priority Classifier Downlink Qos Profiles 182 Downlink Upper Priority Limits 182 Menu 181 Name 181 Priority Type 181 Uplink QoS Profiles 182 Uplink Upper Priority Limits 181 Priority Classifier Name 181 Priority Marking Mode 175 Priority Marking Value 178 Priority Type 181 Profiles Pre configured 197 Protocol L3 L4 Filtering Rule 186 Q QoS Profile Best Effort BE Service Type 183 CIR 184 Continuous Grant CG Service Type 183 cT 184 Menu 182 MIR 185 Name 184 Non Real Time NRT Service Type 183 Packet Size 185 QoS Type 184 Real Time RT Service Type 183 Sample Interval 185
30. 2 RADIUS Parameters Je 53 3 1 3 Radio GUSTO sox cis suet tas acces ears raesencadataaceeeecasscieans catia dead dens daud 54 xii BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Contents SrA ODU Peron er er nee ee ee eee eee ee oe eee 54 3 1 5 ACCESS PT Hr See 54 AE EEE TE dated ae VE EE 55 3 2 Operation VOTING ANON cass seaavesdesenaeee eee 56 3 2 1 AV ODU LEDS nes reer ere 56 3 2 2 Micro Base Station LEDS suavsenssaennsd Aage 57 3 2 3 GPS Adapter LEDS i acace tect caceazcreneusaateeatenecenistencecar J eepineawicemimaneniag eaecanene 58 3 2 4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection rrnnnannrnrrnnnnnnnnennrnnavnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnnnnnnr 58 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 1 BreezeMAX System Management rrmnannvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnennnn 60 4 2 The Monitor Programuuauaauaeanameqeinujjenivjesn j dinnen 62 421 Accessing the Monitor Pr grdmnu sasessueumsmemeeenevumatesuensiniske 62 4 2 2 Using the Monitor Program Luuvsqevqevmmeoaqtikmmamnmaekusavvn 63 4 3 IP Addresses Configuration ssnnnsennnnnrnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn nnn 65 4 4 The Micro Base Station s Main Menu rrnnnnvvnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 66 4 4 1 Micro Base Station Menu rnrrrnnnnnnnvvnnrnnnvnnnnrnrrnnnnnrnnrrnnnnnnnennnnnnavnnnnnrnrnnnsennnnnne 66 442 Radio Cluster Menu serere ieie esep Ra a EE EEKE AR EREE EEE 66 td DODU MEN EA 66 4 4
31. 3 and 4 are not used in Second Order Diversity Mode NOTE In sectors with diversity either second or fourth order diversity new 2 x GHz AU ODUs with HC08 revision 137 HW ready for 10 MHz bandwidth cannot be connected to the same Micro Base Station together with older AU ODUs with HC08 version 134 All AU ODUs connected to the same Micro Base Station must use the same HC08 version Operation and Administration ODU Menu 4 7 4 5 Admin Status The transmit on off status of the ODU The default option is Disabled 4 7 5 Frequency Bands File and Frequency Bands Groups The Frequency Bands Configuration file defines the characteristics of each of the frequency bands supported by the system These characteristics include E Lowest Downlink Frequency E Highest Downlink Frequency E Step resolution E Default Frequency E Group ID In certain cases an AU Micro Base Station can be connected to ODUs using different Frequency Bands The Group ID defines the Frequency Bands Group which includes all the Frequency Bands that can be used by the same AU An AU Micro Base Station cannot be associated with two or more ODUs that use Frequency Bands belonging to different Groups In the current release the following Frequency Bands are supported for TDD systems Table 4 3 Frequency Bands ID Frequency Group ID Frequency Range Resolution Default Band Frequency MHz 12 2 3 2 3GHz 5
32. 4 3 6 10 dBi typical in the 3 4 3 6 GHz band 360 AZ x 9 EL vertical polarization BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 17 Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 4 Micro Base Station IDU to AU ODU Communication Table 1 4 Micro Base Station IDU to AU ODU Communication Item Description IF Frequency E Tx 240 MHz E Rx 140 MHz Ref Synchronization Frequency 64 MHz Bi Directional Control Frequency 14 MHz IF cable Impedance 50 Ohm Maximum IF cable Attenuation 10 dB amp 240 MHz 7 5 dB 140 MHz 8 dB amp 64 MHz Minimum IF cable Shielding Effectiveness 90 dB in the 10 300 MHz band Maximum IF cable Return Loss 20 dB in the 10 300 MHz band Maximum IF cable DC Resistance 1 5 Ohm 1 55 Data Communication Ethernet Ports Table 1 5 Data Communication Ethernet Ports Item Description Standard Compliance IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD Maximum Packet Size 1550 Bytes including 4 CRC bytes and 4 VLAN tag bytes Speed and Duplex Data Port 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Management Port 10 100 Mbps Half Full Duplex with Auto Negotiation System Description Specifications 1 5 6 Configuration and Management Table 1 6 Configuration and Management Item Description Out Of Band OOB Management E Telnet via Management port E SNMP via Management port E Monitor port In Band IB
33. 4 5 3 1 4 4 5 3 1 4 1 4 5 3 1 4 2 4 5 3 1 5 4 5 3 1 5 1 x Cell The Cell parameters provide a unique identifier for the uBST Updated Cell parameters are applied after resetting the BST The Cell menu enables viewing updating the following parameters Operator ID A unique identifier of the network The same Operator ID must be defined for all Base Stations Micro Base Stations in the network and it should not be used by any Base Station Micro Base Station belonging to another network in the same area The Operator ID consists of 3 groups of up to three digits each where the range for each group is 0 to 255 The default Operator ID is 186 190 0 Changes in the value configured for the Operator ID are applied only after reset Cell ID A unique identifier of uBST The same Cell ID should not be used by any other Base Station Micro Base Station belonging to the network The Cell ID consists of 2 groups of up to three digits each where the range for each group is 0 to 255 The default Cell ID is 0 0 Changes in the value configured for the Cell ID are applied only after reset Duplex The Duplex parameters define the operation mode of the system These parameters are applied after reset The Duplex menu enables viewing updating the following parameters Duplex Mode The operation mode of the system TDD or FDD NOTE In systems that support only a single mode of operation any attempt to change the Duplex M
34. 400 seconds O means no suppression E Restore Defaults Enables restoring the Suppression Intervals of all traps to the default value 0 Performance Monitoring The Performance Monitoring menu enables to view and reset the uBST Ethernet Ports and Wireless Port counters It also enables to view or reset the Burst Error Rate counters for the downlink to a selected SU The Performance Monitoring submenu includes the following options E Ports Counters E BER Test E Burst Error Rate Counters Ports Counters The Performance Monitoring option enables to view and reset the uBST Ethernet Ports and wireless link counters The Performance Monitoring submenu includes the following options E Management Port E Data amp Wireless Ports Management Port Counters The Management Port option enables viewing or resetting the Management MGMT port counters The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The counters are reset each time the uBST is reset or upon activating the Reset Counters option The Management Port counters include E Packets Received E Packets Discarded on Rx E Packets Transmitted BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 97 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 5 1 2 98 HM Packets Discarded on Tx Data amp Wireless Ports Counters The Data amp Wireless Ports option enables viewing or resetting the counters of the
35. 7 for 802 1p 63 for DSCP Downlink QoS Profiles Up to four QoS Profile Names Yes separated by commas where each name 1 to 32 printable characters is a name of a QoS Profile that exists in the database The number of entries in the list must be identical to number of entries in Downlink Priority Ranges list Services QoS Profiles Parameters QoS Profile Name 1 to 32 printable characters Yes QoS Type 1 CG Yes 2 RT 3 NRT 4 BE CT Applicable to RT and NRT Yes 1 Short 2 Medium 3 Long CIR Kbps Applicable to RT and NRT Yes 0 12 000 MIR Kbps Applicable to NRT and BE Yes 1 12 000 MIR cannot be lower than CIR NRT 218 Operation and Administration Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Packet Size Bytes Applicable to CG Yes 64 1550 Bytes Sample Interval msec Applicable to CG Yes 5 100 milliseconds Services L2 Filtering Rules Parameters L2 Filtering Rule Name 1 to 32 printable characters Yes MAC Address MAC address or null for Any Yes MAC Address Direction 1 Source Yes 2 Destination Ethertype 4 hexadecimal digits or null for Any Yes Services L3 L4 Filtering Rules Parameters L3 L4 Filtering Rule Name 1 to 32 printable characters Yes IP
36. Admin Status Enabled E Default Action Deny MAC Addresses Deny List The MAC Addresses Deny List menu enables viewing and editing the MAC Addresses Deny List This list is used to deny services to MAC Addresses behind SUs Uplink frames whose source MAC address matches any of the entries in the list and downlink frames whose destination MAC address matches any of the entries in the list will be discarded The MAC Addresses Deny List menu also enables viewing and resetting the MAC Addresses Deny List Counters which display for each of the entries in the list the number of frames that were discarded because they match the entry accumulated since the last reset Managed VoIP The Managed VoIP menu enables defining editing and viewing the parameters that are necessary for proper provisioning of Managed VoIP Services It also enables viewing and resetting relevant statistics counters The Managed VoIP menu includes the following options E Policy Function General Parameters E Policy Function Servers E Voice Domain Policy Function General Parameters The Policy Function General Parameters submenu enables viewing and editing the general parameters that affect the communication of the Micro Base Station with the Policy Function server s and with the SIP devices It also enables viewing the packets received from unknown devices on the port dedicated for communication with the PF server s Operation and Administration Services
37. Administration SU Menu 4 9 3 4 9 3 1 4 9 3 2 HM Micro Base Station level for upgrading all SUs served by Micro Base Station as described in the following section SW Files in uBST Up to four SU SW files can be stored in the uBST Any of the available files can be loaded by the uBST to a selected SU When four SU files are stored in the uBST a new file cannot be added until at least one of the existing files is deleted Default SW File Names and Default Actions can be defined These are the SW File and associated Action that will be used for an SU after network entry This feature simplifies the upgrade process by defining the SW File and Action for all SUs served by the Micro Base Station Two different pairs of Default SW File Name and Default Action may be defined to optionally support SUs using either Standard Operation Mode or Advanced Si Advanced Self Install Operation Mode These Default SW File Names and Default Actions are applicable to all SUs in the Micro Base Station using the specified Operation Mode However they are not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name see Section 4 9 6 2 6 is other than None null This menu enables viewing the current SU SW files stored in the uBST and deleting selected file s It also enables defining the Default SW File Name and Default Action for each Operation Mode Show Files Select this option to display the SU SW files currently stored in the uB
38. Allocation 1 5 Symbols 5 Symbols No 2 3 Symbols Available only via Monitor SU SW Files in Micro Base Station Default SW File Standard Not applicable for current release Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in Yes the Micro Base Station Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main SU SW Files in Micro Base Station Default SW File Advanced Si Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in Yes the Micro Base Station Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main SU Control Parameters SU Status 1 Permanent Permanent Yes 2 Temporary SW File Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in Yes the Micro Base Station SW File Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main SU Registration Parameters Name Read only User Name NA Organization Name Read only NA Address Read only NA Country Code Read only NA BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 211 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated SU MAC Standard FDD Parameters Base Station ID X X X X X X No X 0 255 Base Station ID Mask X X X X X X No X 0 255 SU Phy Standard FDD Parameters Bandwidth MHz 1 1 75 No 2 3 5 3 5 4 7 5 10 Only values supported by the SU will be accepted
39. BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeMANAGE BreezeLINK BreezeCONFIG BreezeMAX AlvariSTAR AlvariCRAFT BreezeLITE MGW eMGW and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Exclusive Warranty a Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed under normal use and conditions will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen 14 months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser the Warranty Period Alvarion will at its sole option and as Purchaser s sole remedy repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion standard R amp R procedure b With
40. DC Powered Equipment uBST Restricted Access Area The DC powered equipment should only be installed ina Restricted Access Area Installation Codes The equipment must be installed according to the latest edition of the country national electrical codes For North America equipment must be installed in accordance with the US National Electrical Code and the Canadian Electrical Code Overcurrent Protection A readily accessible Listed branch circuit overcurrent protective device rated 20A must be incorporated in the building wiring CAUTION This equipment is designed to permit connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor at the equipment See installation instructions E The equipment must be connected directly to the DC Supply System grounding electrode conductor E All equipment in the immediate vicinity must be grounded in the same way and not be grounded elsewhere E The DC supply system is to be local i e within the same premises as the equipment HM There shall be no disconnect device between the grounded circuit conductor of the DC source return and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor Lithium Battery The battery in the Micro Base Station is not intended for replacement Caution To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Line Voltage BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual vii
41. E Warning Issued 3 days before expiry date E License Expired E Local permanent SU received a Local license E Permanent SU received a Permanent license Show License Log The License Log contains the results of all trials to load a license file to the unit The details displayed for each loading trial include the Date Time Load Status Success Failure File Name and Description The Description for a successful operation is License Loaded Successfully For a failed operation the Description provides the reason for the failure RADIUS Managing a large number of users creates the need for significant administrative support together with careful attention to security authorization and accounting The use of RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service enables operators to manage a single database of users supporting authentication verifying user name and password as well as configuration information detailing the type of service to deliver to the user and the traffic that the user transmitted and received for billing proposes RADIUS is a protocol for carrying authentication authorization and configuration information between a Network Access Server NAS which desires to authenticate its links and a shared Authentication server A Network Access Server operates as a client of RADIUS The client is responsible for passing user Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu information to design
42. Enable E Ethernet Port Link Status Up or Down Update Select the Update option to change the Ethernet Port parameters E Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation Enable or Disable E Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex Available only if the configured Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation is set to Disable The available options are 10 Half 10 Full 100 Half and 100 Full Installer Password The Installer Password option enables viewing the current Installer Password and configuring a new password The Installer Password is used for accessing the SU s Monitor Installer program locally using Telnet via the SU s Ethernet port The Installer Password consists of a string of up to 20 printable characters case sensitive Bridging Parameters The Bridging Parameters menu enables setting a limit on the maximum number of Ethernet devices behind the SU and configuring the aging time for devices in the SU s bridging table NOTE The SU s Bridging parameters are available only in the BST They are not available locally in the SU The Bridging parameters are Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices If the Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices parameter is set to Disable the maximum number of supported devices is 512 The default is Disable Maximum Number of Supported Devices This parameter is applicable only when the Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices parameter is set to Enable Operation and
43. Manual 153 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 6 4 2 154 Data Bytes Transmitted The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Ethernet link Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Tx The number of bytes discarded when a packet received from the Wireless port is not forwarded to the Ethernet port due to bridging or VLAN considerations E Wireless Port Counters Data Bytes Received The total number of data bytes received from the Wireless link Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Rx The number of bytes in packets received from the Wireless link and discarded due to MAC protocol receive errors such as duplicate sequence number wrong sequence number etc not CRC errors Data Bytes Transmitted The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Wireless link MAC Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Tx The number of bytes in packets discarded due to congestion in the wireless medium Burst Error Rate Counters In the downlink each burst uses a single rate and may include data intended for several SUs In the uplink each burst is from a different SU also using a single rate The Burst Error rate Counters option enables viewing or resetting the Burst Error Rate counters The information displayed for each rate in uplink and downlink is the accumulat
44. Off No SU is associated HM Green At least one SU is associated ODU 1 PWR 14 IDU to ODU Power Indication E Off No IDU to ODU power output ODU 2 PWR 16 ODU 3 PWR 21 E Red IDU to ODU power output failed ODU 4 PWR 24 E Green IDU to ODU power output OK ODU 1 ALRM 15 IDU ODU communication status E Off IDU ODU communication OK ODU 2 ALRM 17 ODU 3 ALRM 20 E Red IDU ODU communication failure ODU 4 ALRM 23 2 2 2 1 Preparing a DC Power Cable A 2 5m DC power cable is supplied with each chassis Additional DC cables can be ordered from Alvarion If necessary use the following instruction to prepare a DC cable gt To prepare the power cable 1 Usea cable capable of supporting a current of at least 20A Use a cable with 2 x 8AWG or thicker wires for the power plus an additional 8AWG to 20AWG ground wire 2 The matching power connector to be used is Amphenol D type power P N 177TWA 3W3 SP3Y with high power socket contacts P N 17DM53744 1 3 Connect the cable to the power connector as follows Pin 1 RTN Red SAWG min wire Pin 2 48V Black BAWG min wire Pin3 L Ground shield SAWG 20AWG wire 4 Attach suitable terminal rings to the side that connects to the power source 38 Installation Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment FAE Power Requirements Use the following table to calculate worst case power source requirements for the Micro Ba
45. Optional Table 1 3 Base Station 3 x GHz Antennas Electrical Specifications Item Description BS ANT 60V 3 3 3 8 16 5 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 60 AZ x 7 EL vertical polarization compliant with ESTI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 BS ANT 90V 3 3 3 8 14 5 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 90 AZ x 7 EL vertical polarization compliant with ESTI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 BS ANT 120V 3 3 3 8 13 dBi typical in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 120 AZ x 7 EL vertical polarization compliant with ESTI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 BS ANT 60 3 5H 16 dBi typical in the 3 4 3 7 GHz band 60 AZ x 9 EL horizontal polarization compliant with EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 BS ANT 90 3 5H 14 dBi typical in the 3 4 3 7 GHz band 90 AZ x 8 EL horizontal polarization compliant with EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 BS ANT 65 3 5 DP 2 x 16 5 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 65 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS BS ANT 90 3 5 DP 2 x 15 5 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 90 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS BS ANT 120 3 5DP 2 x 13 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 120 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS Omni ANT 3
46. Permanent Services To define a new Service from scratch Verify that the necessary Service Profile s are available in the database Define the relevant Subscriber Verify that the applicable SU is defined Use existing Subscriber Name SU MAC Address and Service Profile Name to define the required Service Once there are various Subscribers and SUs in the database you can skip one or more of the steps 2 to 3 Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 7 Defining RADIUS Based Services 1 Verify that the necessary Service Profiles are available in the database of the relevant Base Station s 2 The Users List of the server must include the default User Name and Password of the Micro Base Station both are KeepAliveUserNameAndPassword 3 The format of the each Service in the ID Filter in the RADIUS Authentication server s is n v h a c The ID Filter may include up to 5 Services separated by ER SIS n Service Profile Name v lt VLAN List gt v lt gt is an empty VLAN list h ON or OFF indicating the configured Hybrid VLAN Mode a lt OFF or ON VLAN ID gt indicating the configured Access VLAN Mode and the Access VLAN ID for Access VLAN ON c ON OFF indicating the configured VLAN Classification Mode Example 1 n be_96 v lt 2 4 5 gt h ON a lt ON 100 gt c ON Example 2 n be_128 v lt 22 gt h OFF a lt OFF gt c OFF 4 10 8 Pre configured Profiles At manufacturing sta
47. SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS Limitation of Liability a ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS Radio Frequency Interference Statement The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to ETSI EN 30
48. SW Version Running From Main or Shadow E MAC Standard FDD Parameters Applicable only to 3 x GHz units 136 Operation and Administration SU Menu Base Station ID Base Station Mask E Phy Standard FDD Parameters Applicable only to 3 x GHz units Bandwidth MHz Uplink Tx Frequency MHz HM ATPC Parameters ATPC Support TX Power dBm E Estimated Distance from BS meters The accuracy is from several hundreds of meters for line of sight links to 1500 meters for non line of sight links E Bridging Parameters Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices Maximum Number of Supported Devices Bridge Aging Time minutes HM Si CPE Parameters Antenna Selection The antenna configured locally in the Si CPE gt Internal 1 6 gt External 7 gt Automatic 8 Interface Type Ethernet or USB Smart Card Status Installed Not Installed Fault E Frequency Scanning Parameters Bandwidth MHz Start Downlink Rx Frequency End Downlink Rx Frequency BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 137 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Q Scanning Main Step Scanning Intermediate Steps Configured and Actual Discrete Frequencies if exist E Best BST AU Parameters g Ke Best BST AU Support Preferred BST AU ID Preferred BST AU ID Mask Selected BST AU ID Selected Downlink Rx Freq
49. Services menu includes the following options E General E Subscribers HM Services E Service Profile E Forwarding Rules E Priority Classifiers BH QoS Profiles E Filtering Rules E Interface Filtering Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 4 1 4 10 4 1 1 4 10 4 1 2 4 10 4 1 2 1 E MAC Addresses Deny List E Managed VoIP General The General menu includes general service parameters It includes the following options Show Select this option to view the current values options of the General parameters Update Select this option to update any of the General parameters The General parameters are Service Mode The Service Mode of the base station The available options are 1 Advanced 2 Quick For more information on Service Modes refer to Section 4 10 1 4 The default Service Mode is Quick 2 4 10 4 1 2 2 Default L2 Voice Managed VolP Service Profile The default L2 or Voice or Managed VoIP Service Profile to be used by temporary SUs in Quick Mode Available profiles any of the L2 or Voice or Managed VoIP Service Profiles existing in the database 4 10 4 1 2 3 Default PPPoE Service Profile 4 10 4 2 The default PPPoE Service Profile to be used by temporary SUs in Quick Mode Available profiles any of the PPPoE Service Profiles existing in the database Subscribers The Subscribers menu enables defining new Subscribers viewing or editing details of previ
50. Station System Manual 25 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines In This Chapter E Installing the AU ODU on page 28 E Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment on page 36 Fd Refer to the BreezeMAX TDD Micro Base Station Installation Manual for more detailed instructions on installation of the Micro Base Station and its components Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 1 x 2 Lil 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 28 Installing the AU ODU The following sections describe how to install the AU ODU including pole mounting the ODU and connecting the cables For more detailed instructions refer to the BreezeMAX TDD Micro Base Station Installation amp Maintenance Manual NOTE In sectors with diversity either second or fourth order diversity new 2 x GHz AU ODUs with HC08 revision 137 HW ready for 10 MHz bandwidth cannot be connected to the same AU IDU together with older AU ODUs with HC08 version 134 All AU ODUs connected to the same AU IDU must use the same HC08 version AU ODU Installation Requirements AU ODU Packing List E AU ODU E Pole mounting kit Additional Installation Requirements The following items are also required to install the AU ODU E IF cable with two TNC connectors see Section 2 1 3 for details on IF cable types and length E Antenna and RF cable for connecting the antenna to the AU ODU E Grounding cable with an appropriate termination E Installation tools and materi
51. Station System Manual 41 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 3 EAN 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 Installing the GPS Adapter Installation Requirements Packing List E A 19 panel for the GPS Adapter module E GPS Adapter module including a 2m Micro Base Station to GPS Adapter cable and four screws Additional Installation Requirements E A grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the unit s ground terminal to the rack or to a ground connection E For installation in a 21 ETSI rack two 21 ETSI rack adapters E Other installation tools and materials 42 Installation Installing the GPS Adapter an T The GPS Adapter The GPS Adapter connects the different GPS units to the Master Micro Base Station adapting the different interfaces Future versions may include an internal GPS module that will allow an all in one low cost solution A future optional addition of OCXO in the GPS Adapter box may provide an improved hold over solution when the GPS is not synchronized The GPS Adapter is powered by 12 VDC supplied by the Micro Base Station The GPS Adapter is installed in a 1U high panel ACTIVE GPS BASE STATION GPS PWR 1PPS ODU INT CLOCK INTERFACE SELECT eo ele 0 ele OC ma GPS ADAPTER Figure 2 6 GPS Adapter Front Panel INT GPS IDU GPS ODU GPS 1PPS IN Figure 2 7 GPS Adapter Rear Panel BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 43 Chapter 2 Installati
52. Uplink Tx Frequency MHz Depends on the SU s HW and the No configured Bandwidth SU Multirate and ATPC Paramete rs Uplink Rate Applicable only if Multirate in uBST is New SU Uplink Yes disabled Basic Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 Connected SU i Last used rate 2 BPSK 3 4 not applicable for TDD 3 QPSK 1 2 4 QPSK 3 4 5 QAM16 1 2 6 QAM16 3 4 7 QAM64 2 3 8 QAM64 3 4 212 Operation and Administration Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Downlink Rate Applicable only if Multirate in uBST is New SU Yes disabled Downlink Basic Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 2 BPSK 3 4 not licable for TDD GOMES Morapplicabie ia Last used rate 3 QPSK 1 2 4 QPSK 3 4 5 QAM16 1 2 6 QAM16 3 4 7 QAM64 2 3 8 QAM64 3 4 SU Ethernet Port Parameters Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation 1 Disable No 2 Enable Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex Available only if Ethernet Port Auto No Negotiation is set to Disable 1 10 Mbps Half Duplex 2 10 Mbps Full duplex 3 100 Mbps Half Duplex 4 100 Mbps Full Duplex SU Installer Password Installer Password Up to 20 printable characters case installer Yes sensitive SU Bridging Parameters Enable Disable Limit on Number 1 Disable Disable Yes of Supported Devices 2 Enable Maximum Number of Supported 1 512 512
53. Yes Devices Bridge Aging Time 1 1440 minutes 3 minutes Yes SU Best BST AU Parameters Advanced Si Best BST AU Support 1 Disable No 2 Enable BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 213 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Preferred BST AU ID XX XK XX No X 0 255 Preferred BST AU ID Mask XX XX XX No X 0 255 BST AU ID XX XXX No X 0 255 BST AU ID Mask XX XXX No X 0 255 SU Radio Parameters Advanced Si Bandwidth MHz 1 1 75 No 2 3 5 3 5 4 7 5 10 Only values supported by the SU will be accepted Start Downlink Rx Frequency Depends on Frequency Bands Group No MHz available for the AU and the Bandwidth End Downlink Rx Frequency Depends on Frequency Bands Group No MHz available for the AU and the Bandwidth Scanning Main Step KHz 2 x 3 x GHz units and bandwidth No 3 5MHz 125 to 1750 KHz in steps of 125 2 x 3 x GHz units and bandwidth 5MHz 125 to 5000 KHz in steps of 125 Scanning Intermediate Steps A sequence of up to 8 entries of No numbers between 1 to 8 or 0 for none Services General Parameters 214 Operation and Administration Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Service Mode 1 Advanc
54. and an Access Concentrator behind the Base Station Any number of Managed VoIP Services may belong to the same broadcast domain if they share the same Forwarding Rule The Forwarding Rule menu enables viewing all Forwarding Rules in the database defining new Forwarding Rules editing details of previously defined Forwarding Rules and removing Forwarding Rules from the database The Forwarding Rules database can hold up to 255 Forwarding Rules The configurable Forwarding Rule s parameters are Forwarding Rule Name A Forwarding Rule Name consists of 1 to 32 printable characters Service Type The Service Type for which the Forwarding Rule is defined The Service Type parameter is configurable only when defining a new Service Profile Add It is not changeable The currently available Service Type options are 1 L2 2 PPPoE 3 Voice BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 179 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 5 3 4 10 4 5 4 4 10 4 5 5 4 10 4 5 6 180 4 Managed VoIP For more details refer to Section 4 10 1 2 Unicast Relaying L2 and Managed VolP Service Type The Unicast Relaying parameter determines whether the Micro Base Station performs unicast relaying When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled unicast packets originating from devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the wireless link devices If disabled these packets are not sent to the wireless link even
55. be followed when defining VPL ID are E Several Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID However the following rules must be met Any number of L2 and or Voice Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule Any number of PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule Any number of Managed VoIP Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule Any number of L2 Voice Managed VoIP and PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided that different Forwarding Rules are used for the groups of PPPoE Managed VoIP and L2 Voice Service Profiles The VLAN Transparency Mode defines the method of transferring packets to the operator s upstream network When set to On data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred transparently The VPL ID parameter is not applicable to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode On E For tagged packets the VPL ID will be their VLAN tag E For untagged packets the VPL ID will be None For packets received from the network the forwarding decision will be according to the packet s VPL ID If the VPL ID is unknown either None or not included in the list of VPL IDs defined for any of the existing non transparent Service Profiles the system will assume this is a transparent VLAN packet if at least one transparent Servi
56. calculated using the data received from the GPS receiver and taking into account the configured Time Zone Offset From UTC The display format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy For example 13 04 23 12 07 2006 E Navigation Processor SW Version The number and date of the Navigation Processor SW Version in the format OxYY 0xZZ dd mm yyyy where XX and YY are the Major and Minor SW Version Numbers in hexadecimal digits respectively For example 0x1A Ox1F 11 3 2006 means that the Major SW BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 85 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 2 4 5 3 2 1 4 5 3 2 2 86 Version Number is 1A hex the Minor SW Version Number is 1F hex and the SW Version release date is 11 March 2006 E Signal Processor SW Version The number and date of the Signal Processor SW Version in the format OxYY OxZZ dd mm yyyy where XX and YY are the Major and Minor SW Version Numbers in hexadecimal digits respectively For example 0x18 0x2B 11 3 2005 means that the Major SW Version Number is 18 hex the Minor SW Version Number is 2B hex and the SW Version release date is 11 March 2005 Management Port Parameters These parameters define the IP and Ethernet parameters for the Management MGMT port connecting the base station to the backbone NOTE It is highly recommended to use the Management port for local management only Typically the port should be down disconnected The Ethernet interface of the
57. dynamic allocation ensures efficient use of the air resources E Prevent callers from placing calls if a sector is overloaded the operator can control and limit the maximum number of concurrent calls per wireless sector and per end user voice gateway Thus the operator has complete control of its network and the resources in it E Automatic support of Codec changing in a VoIP call the DRAP messages update the BreezeMAX equipment on any Codec change or subsequent bandwidth allocation change during the call hence the exact required bandwidth is always provided This is essential in fax transmissions where the call might begin with one Codec and switch to another to accommodate the fax transmission Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 1 2 4 x 4 10 1 3 E VoIP stack is always in synch with the wireless transport as the DRAP is integrated into the VoIP stack all calls are terminated according to the VoIP standard Even if no resources are available the voice gateway receives an appropriate message from the BreezeMAX system and sends the required signaling message according to the VoIP standard used Managed VolP Service NOTE The Managed VolP Service and all parameters and functionality associated with it are intended for future releases that will fully support this feature The Managed VolP service for SIP Voice Gateways uses external Application Function AF entity that serves as a SIP proxy and Po
58. either SNMP management or the Monitor application via Telnet Alternatively it is possible to continue the configuration process using the Monitor application via the MON serial port Refer to Chapter 4 for information on how to access the Monitor application either via the MON port or via Telnet and how to use it To enable proper operation of the Base Station and all its components the following parameters must also be configured NOTE The following list includes only parameters that are mandatory for proper operation of the Base Station Configuration of other parameters may be done either at the same time or later Micro Base Station Configuration Parameters Cell Parameters E Operator ID E Cell ID Duplex Parameters E Duplex Mode must be TDD E DL UL Ratio Synchronization Clock Parameters E External 1PPS Clock in a master unit must be enabled to support 1PPS from GPS Not applicable for a slave unit E External 16MHz Clock in this release must be disabled Not applicable for a slave unit Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters of Micro Base Station 3 1 1 4 Side 3 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 Synchronization Chain parameters E Chain Number M Clock Mode E GPS Protocol E Time Zone Offset From UTC E Daylight Saving E Daylight Saving Start Date E Daylight Saving End Date E Daylight Saving Advance Factor RADIUS Parameters RADIUS General Parameters E Shared Secret RADIUS Authentic
59. frames should be forwarded Such a Service cannot be assigned if there is an assigned non transparent Service with VPL ID None VPL ID A Virtual Private Link ID to be used in the backbone behind the Base Station The VPL ID parameter is applicable only to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode Off To avoid conflicts it is not allowed to define a VPL ID that is identical to any of the VLAN IDs in the already assigned transparent Services Services using a Service Profile with VLAN Transparency Mode On Several Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID However the following rules must be met E Any number of L2 and or Voice Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule E Any number of PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule E Any number of Managed VoIP Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule E Any number of L2 Voice Managed VoIP and PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided that different Forwarding Rules are used for the groups of PPPoE Managed VoIP and L2 Voice Service Profiles Available values are in the range of 0 to 4094 or null empty string for No VPL ID A value of 4095 is displayed for No VPL ID Priority Marking Mode In some cases the network operator may want to use the BreezeMAX system for marking QoS classes in order to provide n
60. if VLAN Transparency Mode is Off or the original VLAN ID if VLAN Transparency Mode is On and the 802 1p Marking Value The original DSCP bits are kept 3 DSCP Marking Mode All frames are marked with the configured DSCP Marking Values If 802 1p classification is used at the SU the frames will be transmitted to the operator s network according to the following rules If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off the frames will be forwarded with their original 802 1p value and the configured VPL ID If no VPL ID is configured VPL ID Null the 802 1p tags will not be forwarded If VLAN Transparency Mode is On the frames will be forwarded without any change with the original 802 1p value and VLAN ID if exists If DSCP classification is used at the SU the original DSCP bits will be replaced by the configured DSCP Marking Value NOTE z E PPPoE frames can be marked only with 802 1p DSCP marking for PPPoE services is not supported HM in L2 Services many protocols may be carried over Ethernet As BreezeMAX bridges all these protocols there s no way to know what protocol type is encapsulated in Ethernet beforehand Consequently if DSCP Marking is configured for L2 the BreezeMAX system uses DSCP marking only for IP packets e g Ethertype 0x0800 If 802 1p Marking is configured it is used for all frames BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 177 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 4 6 Priority Mar
61. if they are intended for devices on the wireless link Unicast Relaying is applicable only to L2 and Managed VoIP Forwarding Rules In all PPPoE Forwarding Rules it is set to Disable In all Voice Forwarding Rules it is set to Enable Broadcast Relaying L2 and Managed VoIP Service Type The Broadcast Relaying parameter determines whether the Micro Base Station performs broadcast relaying When the Broadcast Relaying parameter is enabled broadcast packets originating from devices on the wireless link are transmitted by the Micro Base Station back to the wireless link devices as well as to the backbone If disabled these packets are sent only to the backbone and are not sent back to the wireless link Broadcast Relaying is applicable only to L2 and Managed VoIP Forwarding Rules In all PPPoE Forwarding Rules it is set to Disable In all Voice Forwarding Rules it is set to Enable Unknown Forwarding Policy L2 and Managed VoIP Services Type The Unknown Forwarding Policy parameter determines the mode of controlling the flow of information from the backbone to the wireless media Select from the following options 1 Reject The Micro Base Station will transmit unicast packets only to those addresses that the Micro Base Station knows to exist on the wireless link side 2 Forward Enables the transmission of all packets except unicast packets sent to addresses that the Micro Base Station recognizes as being on its wired backbone side
62. in current release 3 Slave 4 Slave2 5 Slave3 6 Slave4 GPS Protocol 0 None Trimble No 1 Trimble 2 Symmetricom Time Zone Offset From UTC 12 00 to 13 00 02 00 Yes Daylight Saving 1 Disable Enable Yes 2 Enable Daylight Saving Start Date dd mm 12 04 Yes Daylight Saving End Date dd mm 15 09 Yes Daylight Saving Advance Factor 0 to 4 45 hours in 15 minutes steps 1 00 Yes Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout 1 Disable Disable Yes 2 Enable Hold Over Passed Timeout 0 2880 minutes 30 minutes Yes Unit Control Parameters Administrator Password Up to 16 printable characters case admin Yes sensitive 206 Operation and Administration Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Installer Password Up to 16 printable characters case installer Yes sensitive Monitor Password Up to 16 printable characters case monitor Yes sensitive Monitor Inactivity Timeout 0 60 minutes 10 minutes Yes 0 means no timeout Management Port Parameters Management Port IP Address IP address 10 0 0 1 No Management Port Subnet Mask IP address 255 255 255 0 No Management Port Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 No Management Port Destination IP address 0 0 0 0 No Subnet Management Port Destination IP address 0 0 0 0 No Subnet Mask Management Port Auto 1 Disable En
63. includes two identifiers E SW File which is the name of the downloaded SW file This name does not necessarily include clear identification of the SW version number E SW Version which provides the SW version number BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 73 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 2 4 1 4 5 2 4 2 4 5 2 4 3 4 5 2 5 74 The SW Version Control submenu includes the following options E Show versions E Run from Shadow E Set as Main Show Versions Select this option to view the current available versions and the running version E Main SW File E Main SW Version E Shadow SW File E Shadow SW Version E Running From Main or Shadow E Boot SW Version Run from Shadow Select the Run from Shadow option to reset the UBST and run the Shadow version after power up To avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request Set as Main When the uBST is running the Shadow version after selecting Reset and Run from Shadow it will boot from the Main version after the next reset Select the Set as Main option if you want to swap versions so that the running version will become the Main version and will be the version to be used after reset To avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request Create Backup The Create Backup option enables creating backup files of the uBST configuration The backup file contains copies of all the applicable configu
64. is Local QoS Profiles The QoS Profile defines the Quality of Service parameters that are applicable when the QoS Profile is used Different QoS Profile Types are available to support different service requirements Operation and Administration Services Menu E Real Time RT service is designed to meet the needs of Real Time Variable Bit Rate like services characterized by requirements for guaranteed rate and delay such as streaming video or audio These services are dynamic in nature but offer periodic dedicated requests opportunities to meet real time requirements Because the Subscriber Unit issues explicit requests the protocol overhead and latency is increased but capacity is granted only according to the real needs of the connection QoS Profile parameters include Committed Information Rate CIR and Committed Time CT E Non Real Time NRT service is very similar to the Real Time polling service except that connections may utilize random access transmit opportunities for sending bandwidth requests These Non Real Time Variable Bit Rate services such as file transfer and Internet access with a minimum guaranteed rate are characterized by requirement for a guaranteed rate but can tolerate longer delays and are rather insensitive to jitter QoS Profile parameters include Committed Information Rate CIR Committed Time CT and Maximum Information Rate MIR that limits the rate so that bandwidth intensive services wil
65. is not locked 2 1 6 Connecting the Cables Table 2 4 AU ODU Connectors Name Connector Functionality IF TNC jack Connection to the Micro Base Station Y ANT N Type jack 50 Ohm Connection to an external antenna GND Grounding screw Connection to ground earth 2 1 6 1 Connecting the Grounding Cable The Grounding screw marked is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit gt To connect the grounding cable 1 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw and tighten the grounding screw firmly 2 Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground earth connection 34 Installation Installing the AU ODU 2 1 6 2 gt 2 1 6 3 gt Connecting the Antenna Cable To connect the RF cable Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector marked Y located on the bottom panel of the unit Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and moisture Connecting the IF Cable To connect the IF cable Connect one end of the coaxial IF cable to the IF connector on the bottom panel of the unit Verify that the length of the IF cable is sufficient to reach the Micro Base Station See IF cable length limitation in Section 2 1 3 The IF cable connector should be properly sealed to protect against rain and moisture Route the cab
66. issues Appropriate connections are established to satisfy to actual demand according to session status and required bandwidth Supporting Generic 3rd Party VolP Services When using VoIP devices that do not support the DRAP protocol and the SIP Aware functionality based on external AF and PF is not supported the required service can be provided through a Data L2 service with a CG QoS see Section 4 10 4 7 that is defined in accordance with the estimated bandwidth required for the service The required bandwidth depends on several parameters BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 159 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 1 4 160 such as codec type sample rate and T 38 Fax Relay support The service parameters depend also on the marking features of the VoIP equipment the ability to use either DSCP or 802 1p to distinguish between RTP RTCP and VoIP Signaling and Data traffic The system includes several pre configured Service Profiles for commonly used VoIP applications For details on the pre configured profiles refer to Section 4 10 8 For details on defining Service Profiles for generic VoIP devices refer to Appendix B Authentication and Service Provisioning The Authentication and Service Provisioning process is affected by the Base Station s Service Mode Advanced or Quick and by specific SU Status Permanent or Temporary A Permanent SU an SU that is defined as such in the database is
67. life cycle of electrical and electronic equipment e g producers distributors and consumers and in particular those operators directly involved in the treatment of waste electrical and electronic equipment The name commonly given to the IEEE 802 16 standard Specifications for fixed broadband wireless metropolitan access networks MANs that use a point to multipoint architecture WIMAX supports very high bit rates in both uploading to and downloading from a base station up to a distance of 30 miles BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 253 Numerics 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 711 Pre Configured Profile 198 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 Pre Configured Profile 198 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 Pre Configured Profile 198 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 Pre Configured Profile 198 802 1p Marking Mode 176 A Access Parameters 121 Access VLAN 171 Accounting Activity Status 109 Add Server 109 Delete Selected Server 110 IP Address 109 Operation Status 109 Select Server 110 Server Status 110 Show All 109 Show Selected Server 110 Statistics 110 UDP Port 109 Accounting Parameters 108 Action SU SW File 140 Active Alarms Show 94 Active Rule Type 188 Activity Status Accounting 109 Authentication 106 Actual Maximum Cell Radius km 122 Actual Tx Power 117 Index Add Accounting Server 109 Authentication Server 107 Authorized Manager 92 New SU 155 ODU 117 Radio Cluster 113 Add New SU 155 Add Se
68. menu enables viewing the status and parameters of defined Accounting servers adding a new server up to a maximum of two or deleting a server from the database The parameters of an existing server cannot be updated to modify the parameters of a server it must first be deleted and then defined again through the Add Server option Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 7 3 1 4 5 7 3 2 4 5 7 3 2 1 4 5 7 3 2 2 The Accounting menu includes the following options E Show All HM Add Server HM Select Server Show All Select this option to view the current status and parameters of all defined Accounting servers For each defined Accounting server the following details are displayed E IP Address E UDP Port E Server Status Primary or Secondary E Operation Status Up or Down according to the keep alive mechanism E Activity Status Active or Standby indicates whether this is the server currently in use for accounting purposes Add Server Select this option to define a new Accounting server Up to two Accounting servers can be defined You will be prompted to configure the following parameters IP Address The IP address of the Accounting server The default is null IP address must be defined Refer to the limitations described in IP Addresses Configuration on page 65 UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for accounting transactions Valid
69. new L2 Filtering Rule viewing details of previously defined L2 Filtering Rules and removing L2 Filtering Rules from the database It is not possible to edit the parameters of an existing L2 Filtering Rule The database can hold up to 255 L2 Filtering Rules The configurable L2 Filtering Rule parameters are Rule Name The name of the L2 Rule The L2 Rule Name is a string of 1 to 32 printable characters BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 185 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 8 1 2 MAC Address A string of 6 octets where each octet is represented by two hexadecimal numbers separated by dashes An empty entry means Any An Any MAC Address means that the filter is defined only by the Ethertype field 4 10 4 8 1 3 MAC Address Direction The direction Source or Destination of the MAC Address Indicates whether the defined MAC Address is for the Source MAC Address field or the Destination MAC Address field in the Ethernet frame The MAC Address Direction parameter is not applicable to Any MAC Address 4 10 4 8 1 4 Ethertype 4 10 4 8 2 4 10 4 8 2 1 The Ethertype of the Ethernet frame The Ethertype is defined by 4 hexadecimal digits An empty entry means Any and is applicable only if a MAC Address is defined the combination of Any for both the MAC Address and Ethertype is not allowed L3 L4 Filtering Rules An L3 L4 Layer 3 Layer 4 Filtering Rule includes the IP Address and Prot
70. number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server Malformed Access Responses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response Access Accept Access Challenge or Access Reject packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or unknown types are not included Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this Server Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This counter is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject or Access Challenge a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as wellasa timeout Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for any reason Accounting The Accounting
71. of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after network entry and the Action to be taken with this file Not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name see Section 4 9 6 2 6 is other than None null The Default SW File Advanced Si parameters are Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after network entry Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the Micro Base Station or None null Action The operation to be performed with the Default SW File Advanced Si after network entry of an SU using Advanced Si Operation Mode None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main Refer to Section 4 9 6 2 6 for more details on these Actions Delete a File Select this option and enter the name of an existing SU SW file to delete it from the uBST Flash memory Select by Name Use this option to select an SU by name to access the SU menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected SU viewing its performance information or deleting it from the database Select by MAC Address Use this option to select an SU by its MAC address to access the SU f menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected SU viewing its performance information or deleting it from the database Operation and Administration SU Menu 4 9 6 SU Menu The SU menu enables managing and con
72. or Secondary Only one Authentication server can be defined as Primary Select Server This option enables selecting an existing Authentication for viewing its status and parameters deleting it from the database or viewing its Statistics counters The selection is based on the server s IP address The available options are E Show Displays current status and parameters For information on displayed details refer to Section 4 5 7 2 1 E Delete To delete the server from the database E Statistics To display or reset the Statistics Counters for this server The Statistics Counters display traffic information according to the standard RFC 2618 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB as follows Round Trip Time The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from this server Access Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 107 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 7 3 108 Access Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this server Access Accepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server Access Rejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from this server Access Challenges The
73. parameters using Telnet You may also use AlvariCRAFT provided you know the IP parameters of one port and the Authorized Managers list in the Micro Base Station is either empty default or includes the IP address of the AlvariCRAFT station NOTE The default Installer password is installer Refer to the AlvariCRAFT User Manual for information on how to use it The basic parameters are listed in Table 3 1 Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the applicable parameters Table 3 1 Basic Micro Base Station Parameters Management Option Parameters MGMT port E Management Port IP address E Management Port Subnet Mask E Management Port Gateway E Management Port Destination Subnet E Management Port Destination Subnet Mask E Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable E Management Port Auto Negotiation Option E Management Port Speed and Duplex if Auto Negotiation Option is disabled 50 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters of Micro Base Station Table 3 1 Basic Micro Base Station Parameters Management Option Parameters DATA port Data Port Subnet Mask Data Port Gateway Data Port Management VLAN ID Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable Data Port Auto Negotiation Option Data Port Speed and Duplex if Auto Negotiation Option is disabled Authorized Managers per manager IP Address Send Traps Read Community Write Co
74. provisioned with the permanent Service s defined for it in the database if any The Services are provisioned based on the SU s MAC Address A Temporary SU not defined as Permanent in the database will be authenticated and provisioned with the Service s defined for it by the RADIUS Authentication server The authentication and service provisioning are based on the SU Name User Name and User Password The SU will be added to the database as a Temporary SU If rejected by the RADIUS Authentication server or RADIUS Authentication server is not available then the service provisioning for a temporary SU depends on Service Mode In Advanced Service Mode the SU will be rejected no services In Quick Service Mode the SU will be able to use default services based on the Default Service Profile s provided it uses the quick User Password quickynikinyoky It is possible to define up to two Default Service Profiles one for PPPoE services and one for L2 or Voice or Managed VoIP services The SU will be added to the database as a Temporary SU The quickynikinyoky User Password will be sent by the SU in the following cases A quickynikinyoky is the User Password configured in the SU B Anew SU with a null User Name and User Password The SU will send its MAC Address as User Name with User Password quickynikinyoky In this case the SU may receive specific services from the RADIUS Authentication server based on these credent
75. real time services characterized by fixed size data packets on a periodic basis such as VoIP or E1 T1 Service parameters include unsolicited grant size packet size and normal grant interval sample interval Committed Information Rate The rate in bits per second at which a network guarantees to transfer information under normal conditions averaged over a minimum increment of time Customer Premise Equipment Communications equipment that resides on the customer s premises Complex Programmable Logic Device Cyclical Redundancy Check A common technique for detecting data transmission errors in which the frame recipient calculates a remainder by dividing frame contents by a prime binary divisor and compares the calculated remainder to a value stored in the frame by the sending equipment Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection Media access mechanisms wherein devices ready to transmit data first check the channel for a carrier If no carrier is sensed for a specific period of time a device can transmit If two devices transmit at once a collision occurs and is detected by all colliding devices This collision subsequently delays retransmissions from those devices for some random length of time Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 use CSMA CD access BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Glossary CT DHCP DIP Switch DL DOS DRAP DSCP DiffServ DLI EIR EIRP EMC ETSI Committed Time The
76. sequence number etc not CRC errors Data Bytes Transmitted The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Wireless link MAC Management frames and frames with errors are not included Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 5 2 4 5 5 3 4 5 6 Data Bytes Discarded on Tx The number of bytes in packets discarded due to congestion in the wireless medium BER Test This feature is not supported by the current version Burst Error Rate Counters The Burst Error rate Counters option enables selecting a specific SU by its MAC address for viewing or resetting the Burst Error Rate counters for the applicable downlink The information displayed for each rate in the uplink is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The downlink counters can be viewed in the applicable SU menu For each rate the displayed information for the uplink includes E Total Burst E Error Bursts E Error Rate The counters are reset each time the uBST is reset or upon activating the Reset option Licenses The License feature enables managing the license s granted to CPEs with limited capabilities L model CPEs as well as the general Base Station licenses In an L model CPE the overall throughput the aggregate downlink and uplink MIR in all services allocated to subscribers behind the CPE is limited to 2 Mbps The Network Service Provider may purchase from Alvarion a bank of CPE u
77. set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3 Layer 4 Filtering Rules Filtering packets arriving from the wireless link From Wireless Filtering using a set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3 Layer 4 Filtering Rules Discarding packets to from specific MAC addresses MAC Address Deny List This is applicable to MAC Addresses behind SUs The filtering functionality is described in Figure 4 1 Operation and Administration Services Menu Network Wireless Link 4 10 3 4 10 3 1 4 10 3 2 Figure 4 1 Filtering Functionality The filtering definition process includes the following steps 1 Defining list s of Filtering Rules Each Filtering Rule defines a combination of values for certain packet fields Filtering Rules can be of 2 types Layer 2 Filtering Rules using fields of the Ethernet frame and Layer 3 Layer 4 Filtering Rules using fields of the IP and or UDP TCP headers 2 Associating each Interface From Network From Wireless Link with a set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3 Layer 4 filters from the relevant Filtering Rules lists and defining the action to be taken upon receiving a packet that matches any of the selected Filtering Rules Allow forward or Deny discard Common Operations in Services Menu Except for the General submenu all submenus available in the Services menu enable viewing editing deleting and adding applicable entities such as Subscribers Services Service Profiles etc Some or all of th
78. submenu displays a list of numbered options To access an option enter the number of the required option at the gt prompt and press the Enter key At any point in the program you can use the Esc key to return to the previous menu one level up without applying any change The first selectable item in most menus is the Show option enabling to view the current configuration of the applicable parameters For some menus some additional status information is displayed For certain parameters an updated value is applied only after reset or after entering a specific command In these parameters the configured value may differ from the actual value If the configured value differs from the actual value both values will be displayed where the first one is the configured value and the second is the actual value For example Bandwidth MHz 5 3 5 means that the configured bandwidth to be applied after the next reset is 5 MHz and the current actual bandwidth is 3 5 MHz For certain parameters the actual values may not be available such as when pre configuring an ODU that is not yet connected For these parameters a value of NA Not Available will be displayed The Update Add options will display all applicable parameters line by line allowing to conveniently edit all of them The current value is displayed for each parameter To keep the current value press Enter To change it enter a new value and press Enter Press
79. supports voice band data transmission of FAX G 3 over G 711 or T 38 pay phone signaling Tax and reverse polarity CLI as well as other services that are hook flash based call waiting hold call forward etc 1 4 Management Systems The end to end IP based architecture of the system enables full management of all components using standard management tools An SNMP agent in the Micro Base Station implements standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes and parameters of the Base Station equipment as well as the Subscriber Units served by it Security features incorporated in BreezeMAX units restrict the access for management purposes In addition the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support Systems including servers Customer Care systems and AAA Authentication Authorization and Admission tools 1 4 1 AlvariSTAR AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier Class network management system for Alvarion s Broadband Wireless Access products based Networks AlvariSTAR is designed for today s most advanced Service Providers Network Operation Centers NOCs providing the network Operation Administration and Maintenance OA amp M staff and managers with all the network surveillance monitoring and configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the BWA network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network s OA am
80. that may differ from the configured value The default is 20 km Operation and Administration Access Parameters Menu 4 8 2 4 8 2 1 4 8 3 4 8 3 1 Phy Parameters The Phy menu enables viewing updating the Bandwidth parameter Bandwidth The frequency bandwidth used by the radio A change in the Bandwidth parameter will take effect only after resetting the uBST The Admin Status of all Channels belonging to the BST must be disabled to enable a configuration change in the Bandwidth parameter The available options are 1 1 75 MHz 2 3 5 MHz 3 5 0 MHz 4 7 MHz 5 10 MHz The current Bandwidth values applicable for 2 x 3 x GHz systems operating in TDD Mode are 3 5 MHz and 5 MHz The device will reject any selection of a Bandwidth not supported by it The default is 3 5 MHz Multi Channel Parameters Each uBST can include up to 4 Channels with Channels IDs from 1 to 4 corresponding to up to 4 ODU connectors Each channel can be connected to an ODU The Multi Channel menu includes the following options E Show Summary E Diversity Mode E Select Following is a description of these options Show Summary Select this option to view the following information for each Channel E Channel 1 4 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 123 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 3 2 124 Associated ODU E Downlink Tx Frequency MHz E Uplink Rx Frequency MHz Applicable on
81. the other end of the cable to the GPS SYNC IN connector of the Micro Base Station 5 Select the GPS Receiver to be used using the GPS SELECT miniature DIP switches To use Outdoor GPS Receiver move the ODU left most switch to the ON up position Make sure that the two other switches are in the OFF down position To use Indoor GPS Receiver move the IDU middle switch to the ON up position Make sure that the two other switches are in the OFF down position The INT Internal GPS Receiver option is not available in current release 6 Connect the applicable cable s to the selected GPS Receiver NOTE x Refer to the documentation supplied with the GPS Receiver for instructions on how to install and connect it BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 45 2 3 4 Micro Base Station to GPS Adapter Cable Table 2 10 Micro Base Station to GPS Adapter Cable Pin Out DB 15 pin Male Micro 15 pin Female Name Description GPS Adapter Micro Base Station 1 1 IN SENSE GPs Adapter Presence Indication 2 2 EXT 16M IN External 16MHz clock from GPS 10 10 EXT 16M IN Adapter LVDS twisted pair Not Used 3 3 NC Not Used 4 4 1PPS_IN 1PPS signal from GPS Adapter LVDS 1 11 1PPS IN twisted pair 5 5 GPS TX Transmit communication channel from 13 13 GPS TX GPS RS422 twisted pair 6 6 GPS RX Receive communication channel to 14 14 GPS RX GPS RS422 twisted pair 7 7 N
82. the Tab key for context sensitive help text where applicable If an erroneous value was entered the reason of the error or help text will be displayed and the parameter entry text will be displayed again Many menus include a Select By option enabling to get a sub menu for a selected entity according to the selection criteria If the Monitor program is not used for 10 minutes the session will be automatically terminated Select the Exit option in the Main menu to exit the program and terminate the session Operation and Administration IP Addresses Configuration 4 3 IP Addresses Configuration 1 The following IP addresses should not be used and will be rejected M 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 M 255 255 255 255 Broadcast M 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Multicasts RFC 3171 D 2 Note that the following IP addresses are reserved for specific applications M 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 Private IP addresses RFC 1918 A M 127 0 0 0 127 255 255 255 Localhost Loopback Address RFC 1700 A E 169 254 0 0 169 254 255 255 Zeroconf APIPA RFC 3330 B HM 172 16 0 0 172 331 255 255 Private IP addresses RFC 1918 B M 192 0 2 0 192 0 2 255 Documentation and Examples RFC 3330 C HM 192 88 99 0 192 88 99 255 IPv6 to IPv4 relay Anycast RFC 3068 C M 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 Private IP addresses RFC 1918 C HM 198 18 0 0 198 19 255 255 Network Device Benchmark RFC 2544 C E 240 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 R
83. the base address mask for the Cell ID and the last group forms the base address mask for the Sector ID The range defined by these two parameters must be within the range defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask 4 9 6 3 10 2 3 BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask These two parameters define the overall range for scanning in order to find the best AU Micro Base Station The SU will initially scan the range defined by the Preferred BST AU ID and Preferred BST AU ID Mask if applicable If no AU Micro Base Station is found within this range the SU will continue searching in the entire range defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask parameters The BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask consist of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each where the range of each group is 0 to 255 The first 3 groups form the base address mask for the Operator ID The next 2 groups form the base address mask for the Cell ID and the last group forms the base address mask for the Sector ID 4 9 6 3 10 3 Clear 4 9 6 3 11 Select this option to clear the current Best BST AU Table Typically this should be done prior to initiating a full scanning process otherwise the SU will try first the AUs that are included in the current table Radio Parameters Advanced Si The Radio Parameters menu enables viewing and updated the bandwidth frequency scanning and antenna parameters The Radio Parameters menu includes the following options E Bandwidth E Frequency Scanning E
84. the gateway is removed from the database before SW download is completed the download process will fail During SW download the DRAP TTL Retries parameter should be set to its default value of 4 equivalent to 17 minutes Debug Stream The Debug Stream submenu enables configuring the types of messages that will be displayed during the Telnet session upon the occurrence of various events These messages are typically used for investigating various problem situations and many of them are meaningful only to Alvarion s technicians The DS Class Enable and DS Class Disable options can be used to enable or disable various classes of messages The classes of messages that can be controlled include E ERR Error messages that should not occur under regular conditions HM SYS Indication of important events and alarms E TRAP Text messages displaying the information supplied by relevant traps The default for all classes is Disable BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 93 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Ed 4 5 4 4 5 4 1 4 5 4 2 4 5 4 2 1 4 5 4 2 2 94 NOTE Enabling the display of selected classes is applicable only for the current Telnet session These parameters affect only the session and are not stored in the device Upon starting a new session or after reseting the unit all classes are disabled Alarms and Traps The Alarms and Traps menu enables viewing the active alarms or the traps log f
85. 0 4 12 3 4 2PF IP Address The IP Address of the Policy Function associated with the Voice Domain The same PF IP Address may be associated with several Voice Domains The PF IP Address must be the IP Address of one of the Policy Servers available in the database BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 195 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 5 4 10 6 196 Defining Local Service Profiles The process of defining completely new Service Profiles should be done from bottom up as each entity in the process is defined using one or more lower level entities To define a new Service Profile from scratch Define the QoS profiles that should be available for the required Priority Classifier Uplink Downlink QoS Profiles and for the required Forwarding Rule Multicast QoS Profile Define the Priority Classifier that should be available for the required Service Profile All QoS Profiles required for the Uplink Downlink QoS profiles list must be defined in advance Define the Forwarding Rule that should be available for the required Service Profile The QoS Profile required for the Multicast QoS Profile parameter must be defined in advance Define the Service Profile The required Priority Classifier and Forwarding Rule must be defined in advance Once there are various QoS Profiles Priority Classifiers and Forwarding Rules in the database you can skip one or more of the steps 1 to 3 Defining Local
86. 1 489 1 rules and Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial business and industrial environments This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to ETSI EN 301 489 1 rules and Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial business and industrial environments This equipment generates uses and can radiate BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual v Legal Rights radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user s own expense FCC Radiation Hazard Warning Base Station To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1 1307 and 2 1091 of FCC Rules the antenna used for this transmitter must be fixed mounted on outdo
87. 2 Clock Mode 82 The Clock Mode parameter defines the location of the unit in the chain The available options are HM Master E Redundant not supported in current release Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu HM Slavel the first Slave unit in the chain connected to the Master unit E Slave2 the second Slave unit in the chain HM Slave3 the third Slave unit in the chain HM Slave4 the fourth Slave unit in the chain The default is Master Under normal conditions the clocks are supplied by the Master unit to the Slave units If Slave 1 will detect that it does not receive clocks for a certain period of time it will assume that the Master unit has failed and will start using its internal 16 MHz clock supplying the clocks also to the other slave units if exist Slave 2 will wait for a longer period of time before assuming that both the Master and Slave 1 have failed and so on 4 5 3 1 6 2 3GPS Supported This is a read only parameter indicating whether the use of GPS is supported by the Micro Base Station through the Redundant CPLD The options are Supported or Not Supported 4 5 3 1 6 2 4GPS Protocol The GPS Protocol defines the communication protocol with the GPS receiver The available options are None Trimble for Outdoor GPS Receiver and Symmetricom for Indoor GPS Receiver The default is Trimble 4 5 3 1 6 2 5 Time Zone Offset From UTC This is the offset of the local time from U
88. 23 POE sense ea Taai E Eep ide 29 2 1 4 Pole Mounting the ODU Lusagsessmenssmunduesuveinqnukeeauaen 30 25 PRIS va 33 21 56 Connecting the Cables sicuri esna AR E R E REE aE 34 2 2 Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment ranvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn 36 221 Installation RequremenB varnaveresmnsnmuesaund aaenms naisk 36 2 2 2 The Micro Base Station Front Panel eersnnvnnnnrnnnvrnnnrrrrrnnnnennrrnnnnnnnvnnnnrnnrnnnrnnn 36 225 Power Requirements ienien iaiia aana Aa AKE ten 39 2 2 4 Installing the Micro Base Station Unit ressnnornnnrnnnrnnnrnrrrrnnnrnnrrnnnnnnnrnnnrrnnrnnnnnnn 40 2 2 5 Daisy chaining Two or More Micro Base Station murrnnvrnnnnrnrrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnvrnnnnnn 41 2 3 Installing the GPS Adapter 2 niesen jijmnumustbaanen ssadeane 42 2 3 1 Installation Requirement cccccceceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeeenseseneeeseeeeeeeeeseees 42 23 2 NES Ne 43 23 3 Installing the GPS Adapter n macmeenesmreirnnnmmaeenvnvduneivdv runt ianininne 45 2 3 4 Micro Base Station to GPS Adapter Cable rerrnrnnnrnnnnnnrrrnnnornrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnenr 46 2 3 5 GPS Adapter to Outdoor GPS Receiver Cable rrrnnrnrnnnnnnnrvrnrrrnnrnnnrrrrrrrnnnnnnnn 47 Chapter 3 Commissioning 3 1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Micro Base Station snnnnvnnnvnrnnnnnnnnnnnvvvnnenennnnnnnn 50 3 1 1 Micro Base Station Configuration Parameters rrrnnnrnnnrnnnonnvrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 52 3 1
89. 4 Access Parameters Menu rmrrrnnnnornerrrrnnnnnnnvnvnnrnvennnnnnnennnnnnnerernnnnnnnnnennrennnnene 66 445 IN 67 4 4 6 Services Menu vu umemcnmensenasmsepiinj evnene ehkeidnbkndunnvdaa sigende 67 AT Ble 67 4 5 Micro Base Station Menu ammsmunmemnj jm tee 68 BET 68 452 Unit Go Osnes tates ducctansteateceuamsbedendguece 71 TNA 76 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual xiii Contents 4 5 4 Alarms NTP see Gees dassden 94 4 5 5 Performance Monitoring uavassrsssmsse seen 97 255 LEGE RE 99 45 7 PA sv 102 4 6 Radio Cluster Menu aungemaunessumesdemmisletjnmisjaddmee 112 261 Show Sunna pesine e a aE EE ERRE E EA EREE ENE 112 46 EE RE EE NE 112 463 Add ssoesssnek uekte ne E OE A a 113 4 6 4 Radio Cluster Parameters urrnnrnnnnnrnrrrnnnnrnvrvnnannnnvnnnrnnnnnnnerrrrrnnnsnnrrrensennnnnne 113 4 7 ODU Menu ass scses cssases nse narsceennceancsinesstene cin cnasiceneasanassteanteeansaedestenanceeesicennsceumvsansennee 115 4 7 1 Show ST ease 115 EE EE a sabes 116 473 PO eea a a tadederad tangermeseastatataalintasereeieaxtaniase 117 47 4 ODU Paramet f Sarnen EE R R N 117 4 7 5 Frequency Bands File and Frequency Bands Groups rrrrernnnrnnnrrvnrrnnnnennnnn 119 4 8 Access Parameters Menlu muuumunenumbmennnivvvnjn vie 121 EGGE TE ER RE EE EE LEE 121 4 8 2 Phy Parameters ccc tsiecancevenecsdandiseceenecaiewtcegeg auc and ntnde 123 4 8 3 Multi Channel Parameters srrrnrrnnnonnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnrrnrnnnnnnnnrrnnnennnnn
90. 84 5 83 QAM64 2 3 20 80 5 79 QAM64 3 4 20 9 78 5 77 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 15 Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 2 2 X GHz Antennas Optional Table 1 2 Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Electrical Specifications Item Description BS ANT 60 2 X V 16 5 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 60 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS BS ANT 90 2 X V 15 5 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 90 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS BS ANT 120 2 X V 14 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 120 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS BS ANT 65 2 X DP 2 x 17 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 65 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS BS ANT 90 2 X DP 2 x 15 5 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 90 AZ x 8 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS BS ANT 120 2 X DP 2 x 13 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 120 AZ x 8 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 and RoHS 16 System Description Specifications 1 5 3 3 x GHz Antennas
91. 87 L3 L4 Filtering Rules List 187 Menu 187 Interface Type 137 258 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Index Intermediate Scanning Steps 152 Internet Access L2 Pre Configured Profile 197 Internet Access PPPoE Pre Configured Profile 197 IP Address Accounting Server 109 Authentication Server 107 Authorized Manager 92 Data Port 89 L3 L4 Filtering Rule 186 Management Port 86 K Keep Alive Timeout 105 L L2 Filtering Rules Ethertype 186 MAC Address 186 MAC Address Direction 186 Menu 185 Rule Name 185 L2 Filtering Rules List 187 L2 Service 157 L3 L4 Filtering Rules IP Address 186 Menu 186 Port 187 Port Direction 187 Protocol 186 Rule Name 186 L3 L4 Filtering Rules List 187 Last Name 168 Latitude 85 LEDs AU ODU 34 GPS Adapter 44 Micro Base Station 37 Licenses 99 Longitude 85 Loop 131 M MAC Standard FDD Parameters SU 142 MAC Address L2 Filtering Rule 186 MAC Address Control Number 135 MAC Address Direction L2 Filtering Rule 186 MAC Addresses Deny List 190 MAC Parameters Micro Base Station 121 Management Port Auto Negotiation Option 88 Dest Subnet 87 Dest Subnet Mask 87 Gateway 87 IP Address 86 Management Traffic Enable Disable 88 Parameters 86 Select Link Speed and Duplex 88 Subnet Mask 86 Management Port Counters 97 Management Traffic Enable Disable Data Port 91 Management Port 88 Management VLAN Data Port
92. 90 Marking Mode 802 1p 176 DSCP 177 Transparent 176 Max Tx Power 116 Maximum Cell Radius 121 Maximum Information Rate 185 Maximum Number of Retries 105 Maximum Number of Supported Devices SU 146 Maximum Number of Voice Calls Micro Base Station 129 Service Profile 178 Micro Base Station Bandwidth 123 Base Station ID Parameters 121 Configuration Menu 76 Connectors 37 Installation 36 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 259 Index LEDs 37 MAC Parameters 121 Maximum Number of Voice Calls 129 Multirate Parameters 126 Performance Monitoring 97 Phy Parameters 123 Reset Unit 72 Set Factory Defaults 73 Show 68 SW Versions Control 73 Unit Control 71 Voice Parameters 129 Micro Base Station Service Type 129 Minimum Number of Sub Channels 128 Minimum Severity 94 MIR 185 Monitor Via Telnet 63 Via the MON Port 62 Monitor Inactivity Timeout 76 Monitor Password 72 Multi Channel Show Summary 123 Multi Channel Parameters 123 Multicast QoS Profile 180 Multirate Algorithm 126 Multirate and ATPC Parameters SU 144 Multirate Enable Disable Micro Base Station 128 Multirate Parameters Micro Base Station 126 N Navigation Processor SW Version 85 Non Real Time NRT QoS Profile 183 NRT 183 Number of Gateways 131 Number Of Received Satellites 85 O ODU Add 117 Admin Status 119 Associated Radio Cluster 117 Configured ODU Frequency Band 117 Delete
93. A Software Upgrade In This Appendix E Before you Start on page 222 E File Loading Procedure on page 223 E Completing the Software Upgrade Switching Versions on page 225 Appendix A Software Upgrade A 1 x 222 Before you Start NOTE This section describes software upgrades using the Monitor program The upgrade procedure can also be performed using AlvariSTAR For instructions on using AlvariSTARS for software upgrade refer to The Software Upgrade Manager section in the AlvariSTARS User Manual Loading of new SW files to the unit s FLASH memory can be performed by a simple loading procedure using a TFTP application Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of Alvarion s web site http www alvarion com Before performing an upgrade procedure be sure you have the most recent instructions and that the correct SW files are available in your computer If you are loading new SU AU SW files verify that no more than three SU AU SW files exist in the NPU uBST If there are four SU AU SW files in the unit one of them must be deleted before loading a new SU AU SW file To view the current SU AU SW files in NPU uBST Select SU AU gt SW Files in NPU uBST gt Show Files To delete an SU AU SW file from NPU uBST Select SU AU gt SW Files in NPU uBST gt Delete a File and enter the name of the file to be deleted BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual
94. Address IP address or null for Any Yes Protocol 6 TCP 17 UDP or null for Any Yes Port 0 65534 Yes Port Direction 1 Source Yes 2 Destination Services From Wireless Filtering From Network Filtering Parameters L2 Filtering Rules List Add L2 Filtering Rule ID Yes L3 L4 Filtering Rules List Add L3 L4 Filtering Rule ID Yes Active Filtering Rule Type 1 Layer 2 Layer 2 Yes 2 Layer 3 4 Admin Status 1 Disabled Disabled Yes 2 Enabled Default Action 1 Deny Deny Yes 2 Allow Services MAC Address Deny List Add MAC address Yes of a device behind SU Services Managed VoIP Policy Function General Parameter BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 219 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary in the database Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Retry Interval 1 60 seconds 10 Yes Maximum Number of Retries 0 5 3 Yes Listener Port Number 1 65535 3799 Yes UDP Destination Port 1 65535 5060 Yes Services Managed VolP Policy Function Servers IP Address IP address Yes UDP Port 1 65535 Yes VLAN ID 0 4094 or null for none Yes Shared Secret 1 16 printable characters Yes Services Managed VolP Voice Domain Voice Domain Name 1 32 printable character Yes PF IP Address IP address of a Policy Server that exists Yes 220 Operation and Administration Appendix
95. Administration SU Menu 4 9 6 3 8 3 4 9 6 3 9 4 9 6 3 10 The available range is from 1 to 512 devices The default is 512 Bridge Aging Time The Bridge Aging Time sets the aging time for all addresses in the SU s Forwarding Data Base The available values are from 1 to 1440 minutes The default is 3 minutes License The License menu is applicable only to L Limited capabilities model SU It enables loading a new license to the SU if a required license is available in the CPE Licenses Bank In the current release where only a BW license is available after such a license is loaded to an SU its Type will be updated and it will no long be identified as an L model unit CPE PRO L will be changed to CPE PRO CPE PRO2 L will be changed to CPE PRO2 Best BST AU Advanced Si An SU that can communicate with more than one AU Micro Base Station may become associated with the first AU Micro Base Station it finds not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of communication Changes in Base Station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial changes in SU performance The quest for load sharing together with the desire to create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best BST AU feature to enable an SU to connect to the best AU Micro Base Station in its neighborhood When the Best BST AU feature is enabled the SU scans all AUs Micro Base Stations in a predefined rang
96. Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Flow Control Xon Xoff Port Connected COM port 4 The password prompt is displayed Enter the password and press the Enter key to get to the Main menu NOTE There are 3 access levels as described in Section Section 4 2 1 The default password for each of the access levels is Access Level Default Password Administrator admin Installer installer Monitor monitor Operation and Administration The Monitor Program 4 2 2 To access the Monitor program using Telnet The PC used for accessing the Monitor program should be configured according to the parameters configured for the applicable port MGMT or DATA port If you connect directly to the MGMT or DATA port use a crossed Ethernet cable Run the Telnet program connecting to the IP address of the connected port The Enter the password message is displayed Enter the password and press the Enter key to get to the Main menu NOTE If you forgot the Installer or Monitor password the Administrator can log in with the Administrator password and define a new password for Installer and or Monitor access level If you forgot the Administrator password type help to receive a challenge string consisting of 24 characters Contact Alvarion s Customer Service and provide the challenge string after user identification to receive a temporary password You can use this password only once to e
97. Bm defined by the Optimal Rx RSSI parameter Changing the amount of subchannels may causes change in RSSI In order to avoid this reduction in amount of subchannels from 16 full bandwidth to 8 4 2 or 1 will be accompanied with a reduction of 3 6 9 or 12 dBm respectively in the SU s Tx power unless the RSSI of the SU is below the nominal RSSI level The ATPC menu enables viewing updating the following parameters ATPC Enable Disable The ATPC Enable Disable parameter controls whether the ATPC algorithm will be used to determine current optimal transmit level for each SU served by the uBST The default is Enable NOTE The ATPC algorithm should always be enabled The option to disable it is available to support certain tests After each reset the BST boots with the ATPC enabled disregarding its status before the device was reset Optimal Uplink RSSI The Optimal Uplink RSSI sets the target level at which all transmissions should be received by the AU ODUs for optimal performance The range is 80 to 74 dBm The default is 74 dBm NOTE The default configured value is 73 dBm However the actual default value used by the unit is 74 dBm You can see the actual value of the Optimal Uplink RSSI in the Show menu of the Micro Base Station Menu if the configured value differs from the actual one both will be shown starting with the configured value Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu
98. C Not Used 8 8 GND Ground 9 9 GND Ground 12 12 NC Not Used 15 15 12V 12 VDC to GPS Shell Shell Shield it Key 5 Installing the GPS Adapter F Ne GPS Adapter to Outdoor GPS Receiver Cable Table 2 11 GPS Adapter to Outdoor GPS Receiver Cable Pin Out 12 pin Bayonet RJ 45 Name Wire Color Description GPS Receiver GPS Adapter 1 2 Power 12 VDC Orange Twisted pair 9 1 Ground Orange White 2 5 Receive Blue RS422 twisted pair 3 6 Receive Blue White 4 4 Transmit Brown RS422 twisted pair 5 3 Transmit Brown White 11 8 1PPS Green White RS422 twisted pair 12 7 1PPS Green NC Case Shield 10 9 5 ag 12 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Chapter 3 Commissioning In This Chapter E Configuring Basic Parameters of Micro Base Station on page 50 E Operation Verification on page 56 Chapter 3 Commissioning 3 1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Micro Base Station After completing the installation process as described in the preceding chapter some basic parameters must be configured using the Monitor application via the MON port of the Micro Base Station These parameters are necessary to enable remote management using SNMP or Telnet If the Micro Base Station is in the default factory configuration or if the IP parameters of either the Data or Management port are known you may configure the
99. CT 184 D Data amp Wireless Ports Counters Micro Base Station 98 Data Port Auto Negotiation Option 90 Gateway 90 IP Address 89 Management Traffic Enable Disable 91 Management VLAN 90 Parameters 89 Select Link Speed and Duplex 90 Subnet Mask 89 Data Port Counters Micro Base Station 98 Daylight Saving 83 Daylight Saving Advance Factor 84 Daylight Saving End Date 84 Daylight Saving Start Date 84 Days 94 Default Action Interface Filtering 188 Default L2 Voice Service Profile 167 Default PPPoE Service Profile 167 Default SW File Adv Si su 134 Default SW File Std su 133 Defining Local Service Profiles 196 Defining Local Services 196 Defining RADIUS Based Services 197 Delete Accounting Server 110 Authentication Server 107 ODU 117 su 155 SU SW File 134 Device Location 77 Device Name 77 Discrete Frequencies 151 Diversity Mode 124 DL UL Ratio 80 Downlink Tx Frequency MHz Micro Base Station 125 Downlink Basic Rate Micro Base Station 129 Downlink QoS Profiles 182 Downlink Upper Priority Limits 182 DRAP description 158 DRAP TTL Retries 93 DSCP Marking Mode 177 Duplex Mode 79 Duplex Parameters 79 Duplicate Sessions 161 Duplicate SU Name 132 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 257 Index E Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices SU 146 End Downlink Rx Frequency 152 Ethernet Port SU 145 Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation SU
100. Counters for this server The Statistics Counters display traffic information as follows BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 193 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 12 3 194 Round Trip Time The time interval in millisecond between the most recent Access Reply and the Access Request that matched it from this server Requests from BS The number of PF Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions Requests from PF The number of PF Access Request packets sent from this server Retransmissions to PF The number of PF Access Request packets retransmitted to this server Access Accepts The number of PF Access Accept packets sent to this server Access Rejects The number of PF Access Reject packets sent to this server Malformed Packets The number of malformed PF Access Request packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Pending Requests The number of PF Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This counter is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept or Access Reject a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of timeouts to this server that caused packets to be dropped Unknown Types The number of packets of unknown type which were received from this server Packets Dropped The number o
101. D NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Legal Rights OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
102. Data DATA and wireless link ports The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The counters are reset each time the uBST is reset or upon activating the Reset Counters option The Data amp wireless Ports counters include E Data Port Counters Ke Total Bytes received The total number of bytes received from the Data port including Management frames Frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Received The total number of data bytes received from the Data port Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Rx The number of bytes in packets discarded due to internal communication errors Total Bytes Transmitted The total number of bytes transmitted to the Data port including Management frames Frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Transmitted The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Data port Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Tx This count is always 0 No discards Wireless Port Counters Data Bytes Received The total number of data bytes received from the Wireless link MAC management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Rx The number of bytes in packets received from the Wireless link and discarded due to MAC protocol receive errors such as duplicate sequence number wrong
103. Discrete Frequencies BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 149 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Update Scanning Table E Force Full scanning 4 9 6 3 11 1 Bandwidth MHz The frequency bandwidth used by the radio A change in the Bandwidth parameter will take effect only after resetting the SU The available options are 1 1 75 MHz 2 3 5 MHz 3 5 MHz 4 7 MHz 5 10 MHz A trial to configure a bandwidth that is not supported by the SU will be rejected 4 9 6 3 11 2 Frequency Scanning The list of frequencies that participate in the scanning process includes a set of frequencies belonging to the scanning range and or a set of up to 10 discrete frequencies The frequencies belonging to the scanning range are defined by Start Downlink Rx Frequency End Downlink Rx Frequency Main Step and Intermediate Steps The set of frequencies to be scanned is defined as follows The Main Frequencies are defined by the Start Frequency End Frequency and Main Step using the formula F N Start Frequency N Main Step with End Frequency as the upper limit F 1 Start Frequency Main Step F2 Start Frequency 2 Main Step The Intermediate Steps can be used to define additional frequencies using a finer resolution The Intermediate Steps includes a list of up to 8 entries represented by numbers from 1 to 8 or 0 none for no Intermediate Steps The intermediate steps are defined as follows Table 4 5
104. EE a dn MG Your Open WiMAX Choice BreezeMAX TDD Micro Base Station SW Version 4 2 August 2007 P N 214672 Document History Document History Topic Description Date Issued First Release for Beta Managed VolP New product manual Added Intended for future releases that will fully support this feature SW Version 4 2 June 2007 SW Version 4 2 August 2007 serving the same sector Section 2 1 2 Services Specifications Updated SW Version 4 2 Section 1 5 9 August 2007 Commissioning Parameters Updated SW Version 4 2 Sections 3 1 1 3 1 5 August 2007 Optimal Uplink RSSI Updated SW Version 4 2 4 5 3 1 3 2 August 2007 Distance between antennas Updated SW Version 4 2 August 2007 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Legal Rights Legal Rights O Copyright 2007 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty Trade Names Alvarion
105. File Loading Procedure A 2 x File Loading Procedure To load software files Verify that you have IP connectivity from your computer to the NPU uBST either the MGMT or the DATA port To verify the connection ping the unit s IP address and verify that PING replies are being received To perform the upgrade use a DOS TFTP utility with the following syntax tftp i hostaddress put sourcefile where i stands for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be upgraded NPU uBST The put command instructs the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress sourcefile is the name of the SW file in the PC Client For example to load the file su_4_1_1_4 to the SU whose IP address is 172 17 31 215 use the following command tftp i 172 17 31 215 put su_4_1_1_4 NOTE It is recommended to upgrade all system elements with the latest software version Nevertheless it is possible to upgrade each unit separately and independently 3 Following a successful completion of the file loading process the Transfer successful DOS message is displayed The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new version The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after verification If verification tests fail the loaded version will be rejected The unit will reject a file if either the file name or the version number matches the current Main versions Check that the loaded versions exist in th
106. IDU Type Normal Basic Universal IDU or IDU NG 4D1W Number of Gateways The number of Alvarion Gateways connected to the SU including IDU NG 4D1W if exists Service Fault Status OK or reason for denying services to the SU The reason can be 1 Loop problem A loop was detected on the Ethernet side of the SU An rbNetworkingError Trap will be sent and services to this SU will be denied until resetting the SU from the network uBST side provided the problem no longer exists The problem is detectable through periodical every 5 seconds transmissions to the Ethernet link of SNAP packets with AA AA 03 in the header and the destination MAC address is 00 10 E7 00 00 01 If the SU receives this packet from the BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 131 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 2 132 Ethernet it means that there is a loop and the SU will send an appropriate message to the uBST NOTE Another loop avoidance mechanism that is transparent to the operator is performed by the uBST The uBST scans packets received from the network DATA port and verifies that the SRC MAC in the received packet does not match any of the addresses in the uBST s bridging table If there is a match it means that the source MAC address of the message received from the network side is identical to a MAC address of a device behind one of the SUs served by the uBST In case of a match the BST discards all packets design
107. IF Cable Length Double Shielded Cables rrrrrnnnvrnnrnnnrrrnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnn 30 Maple 2 3 AUS DU LEDS Steensen 34 Table 2 4 AU ODU Gonnecdi rs q uusumienkenaemmnunan imvedvevnidn sudansk Ennan ennenen 34 Table 2 5 Micro Base Station Connectors rrarnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnrnrnennnnnnnnnnennnnnene 37 Table 2 6 Micro Base Station LEDS scrcicctstacniannecedancas vias tanned sneedaucrecaetavewleatanlereiguneneddndectacddanee 37 Table 2 7 Electrical Specifications Micro Base Station Equipment rrrrrrrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnne 39 Table 2 8 GPS Adapter Connectors c cccccccccesssssseceeeeeesseessereeeeeeeesesseeneeeeeeeeeesssnnaaaeeeeeessnenee 44 Table 2 9 OPS Adapter LEDS avarter essensen 44 Tables Table 2 10 Micro Base Station to GPS Adapter Cable Pin Out rannrrnnnrnnnvnnnrnnrrrnnnrnnrrnnnennnnnnn 46 Table 2 11 GPS Adapter to Outdoor GPS Receiver Cable Pin Out rrrrnrrrrrrrnnnnrnvrrrrrrrrnnnnnnnn 47 Table 3 1 Basic Micro Base Station Parameters rrnnnnnnnvnnnnorvrrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnrnnnernrrrnnnnennnnee 50 Table 3 2 AU ODU LEDS sss caiasssinsdnacgsticatintsaaentansincutansisacdseaistunartiatinndeasroranisdauisuaniniadttl etahinnesiaile 56 Table 3 3 Micro Base Station LEDS rrnrrnnnononnrnnnnnnnnvnnnrnnrnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnannnnenrnrrnnsennnnene 57 Table 34 GPS Adapter LEDS os stecacisinccecsscacencsactscnsaycshebencecd cea dvate unecanayee
108. Kbps for VoIP Signaling We round it up to 611 Kbps Thus the required RT 11 QoS Profile parameters are E CIR 11 Kbps E CT Short BE QoS for Data As stated the recommended QoS Profile for Data is BE 64 with the following parameters E MIR 64 Kbps E CT Short BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 237 ANSI ARP ARQ ASCII ATM ATPC AU BE Glossary Authentication Authorization and Accounting Pronounced triple a A system or several systems that controls what resources users have access to and keeps track of the activity of users over the network American National Standards Institute A voluntary organization composed of corporate government and other members that coordinates standards related activities approves U S national standards and develops positions for the United States in international standards organizations Address Resolution Protocol Internet protocol used to map an IP address to a MAC address Defined in RFC 826 Automatic Repeat reQuest A communication technique in which the receiving device detects errors and requests retransmissions American Standard Code for Information Interchange A code for representing English characters as numbers with each letter assigned a number from 0 to 127 Asynchronous Transfer Mode A network technology that dynamically allocates bandwidth ATM uses fixed size data packets and a fixed channel between two points for data t
109. LAN Data Port Auto Negotiation Data Port Speed and Duplex Data Port Link Status Up or Down Data Port Management Traffic Enabled Disabled For details refer to Section 4 5 3 3 E Authorized Managers per manager Ke IP Address Send Traps Read Community Write Community For details refer to Section 4 5 3 4 E Bridge Bridge Aging Time For details refer to Section 4 5 3 5 HM Voice DRAP TTL Retries Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 2 For details refer to Section 4 5 3 6 HM MAC Parameters Sector ID Maximum Cell Radius km For details refer to Section 4 8 1 E Phy Parameters Bandwidth MHz For details refer to Section 4 8 2 HM Multirate Parameters Multirate Enable Disable Uplink Basic Rate Downlink Basic Rate Minimum Number of Sub Channels For details refer to Section 4 8 4 HM Voice Parameters Maximum Number of Voice Calls For details refer to Section 4 8 5 E Licenses Status CPEs License Bank Status Base Station Licenses For details refer to Section 4 5 6 Unit Control The Unit Control menu enables changing the access Passwords and the Monitor Inactivity Timeout resetting the uBST reverting the uBST to the factory default configuration managing the SW versions of the unit and creating backup files BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 71 Chapter 4 Operation and Ad
110. Legal Rights Radio Before connecting this instrument to the power line make sure that the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the instrument The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation To avoid possible harmful exposure to this energy do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna The long term characteristics or the possible physiological effects of radio frequency electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully investigated Outdoor Units and Antennas Installation and Grounding Ensure that outdoor units antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna mast when using external antenna are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges In any event Alvarion is not liable for any injury damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation grounding or lightning protection Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste viii Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste
111. MGMT port in the uBST can be configured to operate either using Auto Negotiation or at a fixed speed duplex mode enabling selection between 10 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex or 100 Mbps Full Duplex Management Port IP Address The IP address of the Management port The default is 10 0 0 1 Refer to the limitations described in IP Addresses Configuration on page 65 Management Port Subnet Mask The Subnet mask of the Management port The default is 255 255 255 0 In a binary representation 32 bits the string must comprise a series of contiguous binary l s starting from the MSB followed by a series of contiguous binary O s 0 0 0 0 all zeros meaning nothing and 255 255 255 255 all ones meaning this address only are illegal and will be rejected Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 3 2 3 4 5 3 2 4 NOTE The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters must differ from the local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters and from the subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via the Management port defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters Management Port Gateway The Gateway IP address of the Management port The default is 0 0 0 0 meaning no defa
112. Management via Data Port E SNMP E Telnet SNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 client MIB II RFC 1213 Private BreezeMAX MIBs Authentication RADIUS Software upgrade Using TFTP Configuration upload download Using TFTP 1 5 7 Environmental Table 1 7 Environmental Specifications Type Unit Details Operating Outdoor units AU ODU HP 2 3 WCS 52 C to 55 temperature All other ODUs 40 C to 55 C Outdoor GPS Receiver 40 C to 85 C Outdoor Antenna of Indoor GPS Receiver 40 C to 70 C Indoor equipment OG to 40 C Operating Outdoor units humidity Indoor equipment 5 95 non condensing Weather protected 5 95 non condensing BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 8 Standards Compliance General Table 1 8 Standards Compliance General Type Standard EMC ETSI EN 301 489 1 4 ETSI EN 300 385 Safety EN 60950 1 UL 60 950 1 Environmental ETS 300 019 Part 2 1 T 1 2 amp part 2 2 T 2 3 for indoor amp outdoor Part 2 3 T 3 2 for indoor Part 2 4 T 4 1E for outdoor Radio ETSI EN 301 753 V 1 1 1 ETSI EN 301 021 V 1 6 1 FCC 04 135 FCC 27 53 20 System Description Specifications 1 5 9 Services Table 1 9 Services Item Description Max number of Services per BST 1 023 One or several serv
113. Menu The Policy Function General Parameters submenu includes the following options 4 10 4 12 1 1Show All The Show All option enables viewing the current configuration of the following parameters E Retry Interval sec E Maximum Number of Retries E Listener Port Number E UDP Destination Port E Statistics 4 10 4 12 1 2Retry Interval sec The Retry Interval parameter defines the time in seconds to wait before retransmitting a message to the Policy Function server if no response is received The range is 1 60 seconds The default value is 10 seconds 4 10 4 12 1 3Maximum Number of Retries The Maximum Number of Retries parameter defines the maximum number of retransmission attempts before a decision is taken to revert to another server if configured not applicable for current release or give up The range is O 5 retries The default value is 3 retries 4 10 4 12 1 4Listener Port Number The Listener Port Number is the number of the port used by the Micro Base Station for listening to R3 messages from Policy Function server s The range is 1 65535 The default port number is 3799 4 10 4 12 1 5UDP Destination Port The UDP Destination Port is the number of the port used by the Micro Base Station for receiving SIP messages from the voice gateway provided that a Managed VoIP Service is provisioned to the relevant SU The same port number must be configured in all the relevant voice gateways Breez
114. Menu on page 112 ODU Menu on page 115 Access Parameters Menu on page 121 SU Menu on page 130 Services Menu on page 156 Parameters Summary on page 204 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 1 60 BreezeMAX System Management All BreezeMAX system components associated with a Micro Base station are managed via the Micro Base Station The Subscriber Units are not accessed directly each configuration change or status enquiry is sent to the Micro Base Station that communicates with the SUs NOTE The SU can also be managed directly from its Ethernet port using the Installer Monitor program or the built in Web Server These options are available to support the installation process and enable special tests and performance monitoring at the SU s site The following management options are available E SNMP based management using AlvariSTAR or another network management system customized to support management of BreezeMAX E Using Telnet to access the embedded Monitor application E Accessing the embedded Monitor application locally via the MON port NOTE It is not possible to manage the Base Station vis the wireless link from the SU s side Two management access methods are available to support management using SNMP and or Telnet E Out Of Band OOB management via the dedicated MGMT port E In Band IB management via the DATA port NOTE To enable remote management of
115. N 8 9 pin micro D Type jack Not used currently Connections to external alarm indicators 3 alarm inputs NC or NO ALRM OUT 9 9 pin micro D Type jack Not used currently Connections for activation of external devices 4 dry contact pairs GPS SYNC IN 10 15 pin micro D Type jack Connection to a GPS Adapter or to another Micro Base Station that supplies synchronization signals GPS SYNC OUT 11 15 pin micro D Type jack Supply of synchronization signals to another unit ODU 1 16 ODU 2 19 ODU 3 22 ODU 4 25 4 x TNC jacks IF connections to AU ODUs Table 2 6 Micro Base Station LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR 1 Power indication E Off Micro Base Station is not powered E Red Input power failure E Green Micro Base Station power is OK ALRM 2 Micro Base Station alarm indication E Off No Micro Base Station alarm E Red Micro Base Station failure SP 3 Spare Not Used EXT ALRM 4 External alarm indication Red External alarm received via the ALRM IN port Not applicable to the current release WACT 12 IDU transmission indication E Off No IDU transmission E Green IDU transmission OK BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 37 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines Table 2 6 Micro Base Station LEDs Name Description Functionality WLINK 13 Wireless link status indication E
116. NOTE The recommended minimum distance between any two antennas in neighboring sectors is 0 5 meters The minimum distance between any two antenna in the same sector space diversity configuration is 102 where A C Frequency Hz C is the speed of light in centimeters per second which is equal to 29 979 245 800 An H kit for installation of up to 4 ODUs and 4 antennas that serve a single sector is optionally available from Alvarion Refer to the detailed BreezeMAX TDD Micro Base Station Installation amp Maintenance Manual for information on installing the H accessory The H accessory is designed for separation distances of up to 1 3 meters between antennas E The ODU should be installed as close as possible to the antenna IF Cables The AU ODU is connected to the Micro Base Station via an IF cable carrying both signals and power The maximum permitted attenuation of the IF cable at applicable frequencies its screening effectiveness and its maximum permitted DC BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 29 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines resistance the sum of the DC resistance of the inner and outer conductors are provided in the following table Table 2 1 IF Cables Requirements Item Description Screening Effectiveness 90 dB minimum in the 10 300 MHz band IF cable Impedance 50 Ohm Maximum IF cable Attenuation 10 dB 240 MHz 7 5 dB 140 MHz 8 dB amp 64 MHz Maximum IF
117. Pre Configured Profile 198 Smart Card Status 137 Software Upgrade 221 Start Downlink Rx Frequency 152 Statistics Accounting 110 Authentication 107 Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout 84 SU Add New SU 155 Address 142 Bandwidth Phy Standard FDD Parameters 143 Bandwidth Radio Parameters Advanced Si 150 Base Station ID MAC Standard FDD Parameters 143 Base Station ID Mask MAC Standard FDD Parameters 143 Bridge Aging Time 147 Bridging Parameters 146 Clear All Configured SU SW Files 155 Configuration Menu 141 Configured Operation 131 Configured SW File Name 131 Configured SW Version 131 Country 142 Default SW File Adv Si 134 Default SW File Std 133 Delete 155 Delete SW File 134 Duplicate SU Name 132 Ethernet Port 145 Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation 146 Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex 146 IDU Type 131 Installer Password 146 Loop 131 MAC Standard FDD Parameters 142 Menu 130 Multirate and ATPC Parameters 144 Number of Gateways 131 Organization Name 142 Performance Monitoring 153 Phy Standard FDD Parameters 143 Registration Parameters 142 Reset Unit 139 Select by MAC Address 134 Select by Name 134 Service Fault Status 131 Set Factory Defaults 139 Set Rates 144 Status 138 SW Files in Micro Base Station 133 SW Versions Control 139 Unit Control 138 Uplink Tx Parameters 144 User Name 142 Voice Networking Gateways 145 SU Menu 135 Show 135 SU Ethernet Port C
118. S Receiver is INT Internal selection Internal is not supported in current release indication E Off INT GPS Receiver is not selected INT CLOCK Internal clock E Green Internal 16MHz clock is ok not supported in current release E Red Internal clock is not available or clock failure 44 Installation Installing the GPS Adapter 2 3 3 Installing the GPS Adapter gt To install the GPS Adapter 1 The GPS Adapter is installed on the 1U high panel The panel is supplied with blank covers Release the nuts on the rear side of the panel to remove the blank cover you want to replace with the GPS Adapter Attach the GPS Adapter module to the panel using the four screws supplied with it 2 Place the panel with the GPS Adapter on a shelf desk or install it in a 19 cabinet next to the Micro Base Station unit The distance from the Micro Base Station equipment should allow connection of the 2 meters Micro Base Station to GPS Adapter cable For installation in a 21 cabinet attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the panel 3 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw located on the rear panel of the GPS Adapter and firmly tighten the grounding screw Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground earth connection or to the cabinet if applicable 4 Connect the Micro Base Station to GPS Adapter cable to the BASE STATION INTERFACE connector on the front panel of the GPS Adapter Connect
119. SK 1 2 rate 1 Voice Parameters Maximum Number of Voice Calls This parameter sets the upper limit of simultaneous voice calls that will be supported by the uBST The limit is applicable for calls made by devices using DRAP and or calls made using the Managed VoIP Service The range is from 0 to 50 Voice Calls The default is 50 Minimum Allocation The Minimum Allocation parameter defines the minimum allocation of symbols in the uplink 5 symbols for typical data only services or 3 symbols for deployments with significant VoIP traffic A minimum allocation of 3 symbols can provide a higher capacity for VoIP calls with a reduced overall throughput for data services The options are 5 Symbols the default or 3 Symbols NOTE In most deployments with both VoIP and Data services it is recommended to use the default 5 Symbols minimum allocation Consult with Alvarion s experts whether to use 3 Symbols minimum allocation in certain sectors according to the specific traffic that should be supported Minimum Allocation can be changed only via the Monitor program not available via SNMP BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 129 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 4 9 1 130 SU Menu The SU menu includes the following options Show Summary SW Files in BST Select by Name Select by MAC Address Add Clear All Configured SU SW Files Following is a detailed description of these options
120. ST For each available SW file the file name and the version number are displayed In addition the Default SU SW File Name if defined and Default Action for each Operation Mode are also displayed Default SW File Standard Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Standard Operation Mode after network entry and the Action to be taken with this file Not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name see Section 4 9 6 2 6 is other than None null NOTE The Default SW File Standard option is not applicable to this release that does not support products operating in Standard Operation Mode The Default SW File Standard parameters are BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 133 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 3 2 1 4 9 3 2 2 4 9 3 3 4 9 3 3 1 4 9 3 3 2 4 9 3 4 4 9 4 4 9 5 134 Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Standard Operation Mode after network entry Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the Micro Base Station or None null Action The operation to be performed with the Default SW File Standard after network entry of an SU using Standard Operation Mode None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main Refer to Section 4 9 6 2 6 for more details on these Actions Default SW File Advanced Si Select this option to define the Name
121. Station System Manual 91 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 4 4 5 3 4 1 4 5 3 4 2 4 5 3 4 3 4 5 3 4 3 1 4 5 3 4 3 2 4 5 3 4 3 3 4 5 3 4 3 4 92 Authorized Managers The Authorized Managers submenu enables defining the properties of management stations that are allowed to manage the Micro Base Station using SNMP including the SUs associated with it NOTE If no Authorized Manager is defined in the device it can be managed using SNMP by any station with the default Read and Write Communities If at least one Authorized Manager is defined the device can be managed only by a station whose parameters match a defined Authorized Manager The Authorized Manager submenu includes the following options Show All Select this option to view the details of all currently defined authorized managers Select This option enables selecting an existing authorized manager for viewing or updating its properties or for deleting it from the database The selection is based on the authorized manager s IP address Refer to the following Add section for details on the configurable parameters Add Select this option to add a new authorized manager Up to 10 Authorized Manager can be defined The following parameters can be configured IP Address The IP address of the Authorized Manager Refer to the limitations described in IP Addresses Configuration on page 65 Send Traps The Send Traps parameters wheth
122. TC Coordinated Universal Time The range is from 12 00 up to 13 00 in 30 minutes resolution The format must be either XX YY or XX YY where YY is either 00 or 30 The default is 02 00 4 5 3 1 6 2 6 Daylight Saving The Daylight Saving parameter is used to enable or disable the daylight saving feature using the following Daylight Saving Start Date End Date and Advance Factor parameters The default is Enable BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 83 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 1 6 2 7 Daylight Saving Start Date When Daylight Saving is enabled this parameter defines the date for starting the daylight saving feature At the beginning of this date midnight at the beginning of this date the clock will be advanced by the amount of hours specified by the Daylight Saving Advance Factor see below Use the format dd mm to define the date and month at which to start activating the Daylight Saving feature The default is 12 04 4 5 3 1 6 2 8 Daylight Saving End Date When Daylight Saving is enabled this parameter defines the date for ending the daylight saving feature at Daylight Saving Advance Factor hours after midnight at the end of this date Use the format dd mm to define the date and month at which to end activating the Daylight Saving feature The default is 15 09 4 5 3 1 6 2 9 Daylight Saving Advance Factor This parameter enables configuring the amount of time by which t
123. able No negotiation Option 2 Enable Management Port Speed and 1 10 Mbps Half Duplex No AE 2 10 Mbps Full duplex 3 100 Mbps Half Duplex 4 100 Mbps Full Duplex Management Port Management 1 Disable Enable Yes Traffic Enable Disable 2 Enable Data Port Parameters Data Port IP Address IP address 1 1 1 3 No Data Port Subnet Mask IP address 255 255 255 0 No Data Port Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 No Data Port Management VLAN ID 0 4094 or Null for No VLAN Null Yes Data Port Auto Negotiation 1 Disable Enable No Option 2 Enable BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 207 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Data Port Speed and Duplex 1 10 Mbps Half Duplex No 2 10 Mbps Full duplex 3 100 Mbps Half Duplex 4 100 Mbps Full Duplex Data Port Management Traffic 1 Disable Enable Yes Enable Disable 2 Enable Authorized Managers Authorized Manager IP Address IP address NA Yes Authorized Manager Send Traps 1 Disable NA Yes 2 Enable Authorized Manager Read Up to 23 printable characters case NA Yes Community sensitive Authorized Manager Write Up to 23 printable characters case NA Yes Community sensitive Bridge Bridge Aging Time 1 1440 minutes or 0 for no aging 10 minutes Yes Voice DRAP TTL Retries 1 100 4 Yes Radio Cluster Parameters Radio Clust
124. al Time 183 SU MAC Address 169 Types 157 VLAN Classification Mode 170 VLAN List 169 Voice DRAP based 158 Service Fault Status 131 Service Mode 167 Service Profile Definition 156 Maximum Number of Voice Calls 178 Menu 173 Name 173 Priority Marking Mode 175 Priority Marking Value 178 Service Type 173 VLAN Transparency Mode 174 VPL ID 175 Service Profile Class 179 182 Service Profile Name 173 Service Profiles Defining Local Service Profiles 196 Service Type L2 Service 157 PPPoE 157 Voice 158 Services Defining Local Services 196 Defining RADIUS Based Services 197 Session Timeout 161 Set as Main Micro Base Station 74 SU 141 Set Factory Defaults Micro Base Station 73 su 139 Set Rates 144 Severity Trap Configuration 96 Shared Secret 105 Show Accounting Server 110 Authentication Server 107 Base Station Licenses 101 CPEs License Bank Status 100 General Service Parameters 167 Grace Licenses 101 Micro Base Station Parameters 68 ODU 116 SU 135 Temporary Grace Licenses 101 Show Active Alarms 94 Show All Accounting Servers 109 Authentication Servers 106 Authorized Managers 92 Show MAC Addresses Behind SU 155 Show Summary 262 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Index Multi Channel 123 ODU 115 Radio Cluster 112 SU 130 Show Traps Log 95 Signal Processor SW Version 86 Silver LAN to LAN Pre Configured Profile 198 Silver Teleworking
125. als including appropriate means e g a 1 to 4 pole for installing the AU ODU and antenna E An H kit for installation of up to 4 ODUs and 4 antennas that serve a single sector is optionally available NOTE Items marked with an asterisk are available from Alvarion Installation Installing the AU ODU Lideg Fler Guidelines for Positioning the AU ODU This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation locations for the AU ODU and its antenna CAUTION ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should install outdoor units and antennas Failure to do so may void the BreezeMAX product warranty and may expose the end user or Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or antennas Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines E The ODU can be either pole or wall mounted Its location should enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing E The higher the placement of the antenna the better the achievable link quality E The antenna should be installed so as to provide coverage to all Subscriber Units within its service area
126. also enables viewing resetting the counter for a selected Rule The counter displays the number of frames matching the Rule accumulated since the last reset The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status L3 L4 Filtering Rules List The L3 L4 Filtering Rules List submenu enables viewing details on the L3 L4 Filtering Rules assigned to the interface adding Rules from the L3 L4 Filtering Rules lists to the list of Rules assigned to the interface and deleting one or all Rules from the list It also enables viewing resetting the counter for a selected Rule The counter displays the number of frames matching the Rule accumulated since the last reset The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 187 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 9 3 4 10 4 9 4 4 10 4 9 5 EA 188 Active Rule Type The Active Rule Type parameter defines which of the Filtering Rules List is used The available options are Layer 2 and Layer 3 4 The default option is Layer 2 Admin Status The Admin Status parameter defines whether the filtering mechanism is enabled or disabled The default option is Disabled Default Action The Default Action parameter defines the action to be taken for a frame matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules Deny discard or Allow forward If the De
127. and the configured VPL ID If no VPL ID is configured VPL ID Null the 802 1p tags will not be forwarded If VLAN Transparency Mode is On the frames will be forwarded without any change with the original 802 1p value and VLAN ID if exists For DSCP classification at the SU Ifthe VPL ID is configured VLAN Transparency Mode Off the uBST adds an 802 1Q header with the configured VPL ID and 802 1p 0 If VLAN Transparency Mode is On the uBST adds a 802 1Q header with the original VLAN ID if exists Note that there may be a disparity between the DSCP values and the default 802 1p O value 802 1p Marking Mode Operation and Administration Services Menu If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off all frames are marked with the configured VPL ID and the 802 1p Marking Value If no VPL ID is configured VPL ID None the 802 1Q header will include a VLAN ID 0 If VLAN Transparency Mode is On all frames are marked with the original VLAN ID and the 802 1p Marking Value NOTE x If the Priority Marking Value is set to 0 untagged packets without VLAN ID will be forwarded without any change This is applicable to transparent services and to to non transparent services with no VPL ID If 802 1p classification is used at the SU the original 802 1p tags are replaced by the configured 802 1p Marking Value If DSCP classification is used at the SU an 802 1Q header is added with the configured VPL ID
128. angeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset Set Factory Defaults Select this option to set the uBST parameters excluding the access Passwords to their factory default values Refer to Section 4 11 for information on the factory default values of these parameters The parameters will revert to their default values after the next reset CAUTION Setting the parameters of the uBST to their default values will disable remote management of the unit since this affects the IP and Ethernet parameters and will delete all Authorized Managers SW Version Control The uBST can contain two SW versions E Main Each time the uBST resets it will reboot using the version defined as Main E Shadow Normally the Shadow version is the backup version Each time a new SW File is downloaded to the uBST it will be stored as a Shadow version replacing the previous Shadow Version The typical process of upgrading to a new SW version includes the following steps 1 Download the new SW File to the uBST It will be stored as the Shadow version 2 Reset and run the module from its Shadow version Note that at this stage if a reset were to occur the unit will return to the previous Main version 3 If you want to continue using the new version swap the Shadow and Main versions The new version is now defined as Main and will be used each time the module reboots The previous version is defined now as Shadow Each SW version
129. annel is used 1 After configuring the Downlink Frequencies f1 for one of the Channels the Downlink Frequencies for other Channels should be configured using increments of 0 875 MHz from the defined frequency f1 N 0 875 2 The Downlink Frequencies of all Channels should belong to the same Frequency Bands Group see Section 4 7 5 E Admin Status The Admin Status must be disabled to enable changes in the Configured ODU Frequency Band of an associated ODU If the Configured ODU Frequency Band differs from the actual band supported by the ODU a mismatch trap will be sent by the uBST upon trying to associate it with a Channel and the association will be rejected BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 125 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 4 126 The Admin Status of all Channels must be disabled to enable a configuration change in the Bandwidth parameter If the Diversity Mode is set to Fourth Order Diversity the Downlink Tx Frequency and Admin Status of Channels 2 4 are not configurable they are set automatically to the same values configured for Channel 1 The Tx Power of the ODUs associated with Channels 2 4 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1 If the Diversity Mode is set to Second Order Diversity the Downlink Tx Frequency and Admin Status of Channel 2 are not configurable they are set automatically to the same values configured for Channel 1 The Tx Po
130. arameters for Standard operation mode These parameters do not affect the operation of the unit when using Advanced Si operation mode These parameters are provided to support the Automatic Platform Detection mechanism of the dual mode CPEs allowing pre configuration of the relevant parameters before switching the sector to operate in FDD mode using Standard operation mode These parameters are applicable only to SUs in the 3 x GHz bands Operation and Administration SU Menu 4 9 6 3 2 1 4 9 6 3 2 2 4 9 6 3 3 4 9 6 3 3 1 Base Station ID The Base Station ID is the identifier of the AU Micro Base Station to which the SU can connect An SU can be authenticated by an AU Micro Base Station only if the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask configured in the SU match the Base Station ID configured for the AU Micro Base Station After power up the SU will start searching for available AUs Micro Base Stations in the range defined by the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask and will try to connect to the first found AU Micro Base Station whose Base Station ID is in the defined range A change in the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask will take effect only after resetting the SU The Base Station ID consists of six groups of up to three digits each where the range for each group is 0 to 255 The first three groups define the Operator ID the next two groups define the Cell ID and the sixth group defines the Sector ID
131. arent Best Effort NA 128 Short Although Long CT may be indicated for this BE QoS Profile legacy from previous versions the actual CT is Short BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 203 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 11 Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Micro Base Station General Parameters Device Name Up to 255 printable characters Null Yes Device Location Up to 255 printable characters Null Yes ATPC Enable Disable 1 Disable Enable Yes 2 Enable Disable is temporary until next reset of the AUs Optimal Uplink RSSI dBm 80 to 74 74 No Operator ID X X X 186 190 0 No X 0 255 Cell ID X X 0 250 No X 0 255 Duplex Mode FDD TDD TDD No Only TDD spplicable to current version DL UL Ratio 1 65 35 50 50 No 2 60 40 3 55 45 4 50 50 5 45 55 6 40 60 7 35 65 See Section 4 5 3 1 5 2 for limitations External 1PPS Clock 1 Disable Enable No 2 Enable External 16MHz Clock 1 Disable Disable No 2 Enable 204 Operation and Administration Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Alarms an
132. arns the VLAN behind the SU it belongs to Currently the following Service types are supported E 12 layer 2 Data Service E PPPoE Data Service HM Voice Service E Managed VoIP Service Service Types L2 Service L2 Layer 2 service transports Layer 2 Ethernet frames between the subscriber s site and the Network Resource located behind the provider s backbone and or between the subscriber s sites L2 service is transparent to the layer 3 protocol it can also be used for PPPoE traffic and it support DRAP based Voice services PPPoE Service PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet Access service provides connectivity between a PPPoE enabled devices at the subscriber s site and a PPPoE aware Access Concentrator behind the Base Station In a PPPoE Forwarding Rule Unicast and Multicast Relaying are always disabled packets with Unknown Address are always rejected The frames are forwarded only between the Subscribers PCs and the PPPoE Access Concentrator Frames that are not PPPoE Ethertype are discarded BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 157 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 1 2 3 158 Voice Service The Voice service provides telephony services through an external Voice Gateway connected to the Subscriber Unit s data port The Voice service is designed for Alvarion s Voice Gateways using the proprietary DRAP signaling protocol to identify VoIP sessions and to verify optimal handling of th
133. asts Typically this includes broadcasts with IP Ethertype The parameters of this rule will be E MAC Address FF FF FF FF FF FF E MAC Address Direction Destination E Ethertype 800 Assuming the intention is to block this broadcast in both directions this Filtering Rule should be included in the L2 Filtering Rules List of both the From Network Filtering and the From Wireless Filtering In addition for both Interfaces the following configuration should be defined E Active Rule Type Layer 2 E Admin Status Enabled E Default Action Deny If broadcasts using other Ethertypes except IP ARP and PPPoE are excepted similar Layer 2 Filtering Rules should be defined for these Ethertypes with the broadcast MAC Address and these rules should be added to the applicable Layer 2 Filtering Rules Lists Example 2 Block DHCP Server behind SU To prevent the use of a DHCP server behind an SU define the following L3 L4 Filtering Rule E IP Address Any empty E Protocol 17 UDP E Port 67 the source port of the DHCP server HM Port Direction Source BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 189 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 11 4 10 4 12 4 10 4 12 1 190 This Filtering Rule should be included in the L3 L4 Filtering Rules List of the From Wireless Filtering In addition the following configuration should be defined for the From Wireless Filtering Interface E Active Rule Type Layer 3 4 E
134. ated RADIUS server s and then acting on the response RADIUS servers are responsible for receiving user connection requests authenticating the user and then returning all configuration information necessary for the client to deliver service to the user In BreezeMAX systems a RADIUS NAS is implemented in each Base Station Transactions between the client and RADIUS server are authenticated using Password Authentication Protocol PAP through encryption based on RSA Message Digest Algorithm MD5 and a Shared Secret which is never sent over the network The Access Request is submitted to the RADIUS server via the network If no response is returned within a length of time the request is re sent a number of times Once the RADIUS server receives the request it validates the sending client A request from a client for which the RADIUS server does not have a shared secret must be silently discarded If the client is valid the RADIUS server consults a database of users to find the user whose User Name matches the request The user entry in the database contains the User Password that must be verified The SU authentication is a part of the network entry process 1 User Name and Password should be configured in the SU 2 All required Service Profiles and theitr components should be configured in the Micro Base Station see Defining Local Service Profiles on page 196 3 The RADIUS Authentication server s should be configured with the rel
135. ated to the device with this MAC address until it s aging time expires 2 Duplicate SU Name The SU Name User Name is already in use by another SU connected to the same Micro Base Station A Micro Base Station cannot serve two SUs with the same User Name Upon identifying an SU with an SU Name User Name that is identical to that of a previously registered SU the new SU will be registered to enable management but will not receive any services Its name in the BST database will be changed to SU lt SU s MAC Address gt The system administrator will be informed of the problem through the Fault Status parameter in any of the relevant Show menus Fault Status 2 and through a trap message rbSuDuplicateName trap If the administrator decides that the SU is legitimate and should receive services a new User Name must be configured in the SU The SU will receive services only after configuring it with a User Name that is unique in the Micro Base Station s database see also Section 4 9 6 3 1 1 E Summary Information Total Number of SUs The total number of SUs in the database including connected and pre configured SUs Total Connected SUs NOTE An SU that is defined as Temporary will be deleted from the database when it is disconnected Upgrading SU s SW To facilitate efficient upgrade of SU s SW two upgrade levels are available E SU level for upgrading a single SU described in Section 4 9 6 2 6 Operation and
136. ation At least one Authentication server must be defined to enable RADIUS based provisioning of services HM IP Address HM UDP Port HM Server Status RADIUS Accounting At least one Accounting server must be defined to enable RADIUS based accounting HM IP Address E UDP Port BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 53 i Chapter 3 Commissioning he 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 5 1 3 1 5 2 3 1 5 3 HM Server Status Radio Cluster E Radio Cluster ID Verify that all required Radio Cluster IDs are defined ODU Define the necessary ODUs For each ODU configure the following E ODU ID E Associated Radio Cluster E Configured ODU Frequency Band E Tx Power E Admin Status Enable when completing the configuration process Access Parameters MAC E Sector ID E Maximum Cell Radius km Phy E Bandwidth Multi Channel E Diversity Mode The following parameters must be configured for each channel used if Diversity Mode is No Diversity Otherwise only Channel 1 needs to be configured E Associated ODU E Downlink Tx Frequency MHz I 54 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters of Micro Base Station E Admin Status Enable when completing the configuration process 3 1 5 4 Multirate E Uplink Basic Rate E Minimum Number of Sub Channels E Downlink Basic Rate 3 1 5 5 Voice E Maximum Number of Voice Calls E Minimum Allocation 3 1 6 SU 3 1 6 1 SW Files in Micro Base Station Defa
137. ation Using Special Clamps NOTE Ea There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod Insert the threaded rods with the grooves i pointing outward as these grooves enable you to use a screwdriver to fasten the rods to the unit BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 31 l Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 1 4 2 Pole Mounting the 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP Using Metal Bands Figure 2 2 illustrates the method of mounting a High Power 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP on a pole using metal bands TT PE r Vg 1 a SR ce rd Mr Figure 2 2 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP Pole Installation Using Metal Band i 32 Installation Installing the AU ODU 2 1 5 AU ODU Grounding Screw Impermeability Test Screw Grounding Screw Impermeability Test Screw Not Used Figure 2 4 Bottom Panel of the AU ODU HP 2 3 GHz WCS BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 33 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines CAUTION A Do not open the impermeability test screw you may impair the sealing of the unit against moisture and humidity Table 2 3 AU ODU LEDs Name Description Functionality ETH Not Used PWR Power indication E Off Power failure E Green Power to ODU is OK internal 3 3 VDC power supply is OK ALARM IDU ODU communication and MI Off IDU ODU communication is OK synthesizer status indication synthesizer is locked E Red IDU ODU communication failure or synthesizer
138. aximum supported by the ODU the power will be changed to the maximum value supported by the unit applicable only for an associated ODU Update Select this option to update one or more of the selected ODU s parameters For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4 7 4 Delete Select this option to delete the selected ODU from the database Add Select this option to define a new ODU For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4 7 4 ODU Parameters ODU ID A number used to identify the ODU The ODU ID is configurable only when adding a new ODU The available values range from 1 to 4 Associated Radio Cluster The ID of the associated Radio Cluster The available values range from 1 to 4 The value must be that of an already defined Radio Cluster Configured ODU Frequency Band The Configured ODU Frequency Band will be modified through the use of Frequency Bands Configuration file see Section 4 7 5 The available values are the list numbers from the displayed list of available Frequency Bands The Configured ODU Frequency Band can be updated only if the ODU is not associated with any Channel or if the Admin Status of the associated Channel is Disabled BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 117 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 7 4 4 118 Compatibility between the Configured ODU Frequency Band and its actual band is verified by the uBST upon trying to ass
139. based Gateways 06 200 Table 4 14 Pre Configured Service Profiles for Generic VolP Services rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnnn 201 Table 4 15 Pre Configured Forwarding Rule for Voice Services rrrrrrrnrrrrrrrnnnnnvvnnnrrnnrrnnrrennr 201 Table 4 16 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic VolP Service rrrrnrnrnnrrrrrrrnnnnnnn 201 Table 4 17 Pre Configured BE and RT QoS Profile for Generic VoIP Services 2 0 202 Table 4 18 Pre Configured CG QoS Profile for Generic VoIP Services rrrrrrrnrnrrnrrrrrrrrnnnnnn 202 Table 4 19 Pre Configured Forwarding Rule for Transparent Services c sseeeeeeeeeeeeee 203 Table 4 20 Pre Configured QoS Profile for Transparent Services mmrrrrrrnrannnvrnnrrrnrrrnnernnnr 203 XX BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Tables Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary rerrnnnrrnnnrnvnvrrnnnonnrvnnnrnnnrnnerennr 204 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual xxi Chapter 1 System Description In This Chapter E Introducing BreezeMAX on page 2 HM The Micro Base Station on page 5 E Networking Equipment on page 10 E Management Systems on page 11 E Specifications on page 14 Chapter 1 System Description ud Introducing BreezeMAX BreezeMAX TDD BreezeMAX is Alvarion s WiMAX compatible platform operating in Time Division Duplex TDD mode It leverages Alvarion
140. bedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC Crossed Cable connection to a hub Straight GPS SYNC IN 15 pin micro D Type jack GPS SYNC OUT 15 pin micro D Type jack MON 3 pin low profile jack ODU 1 ODU 2 4 x TNC jack lightning protected ALRM IN 9 pin micro D Type jack ALRM OUT 9 pin micro D Type jack AU ODU IF TNC jack lightning protected ANT N Type jack 50 Ohm lightning protected GPS Adapter BASE STATION INTERFACE 15 pin D Type jack IDU GPS CMD 9 pin D Type jack IDU GPS 1PPS IN BNC jack ODU GPS RJ 45 jack Indoor GPS Receiver POWER 4 pins power plug TIME OF DAY CHANNEL 9 pin D Type jack COMMAND CHANNEL 9 pin D Type jack 2 048MHz BNC jack 1PPS BNC jack ANTENNA TNC jack Outdoor GPS Receiver 12 pin round plug BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 10 4 2 X GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications Table 1 13 Micro Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications Unit Description Dimensions cm Weight kg BS ANT 60 2 X V Downtilt Mounting Kit 2 to 4 5 pole 109 3 x 21 3 x 12 4 5 maximum Connector N Type female BS ANT 90 2 X V Downtilt Mounting Kit 2 to 4 5 pole 109 3 x 21 3 x 12 2 5 maximum Connector N Type female BS ANT 120 2 X V Downtilt Mounting Kit 2 to 4 5 pole 109 3 x 20 5 x 11 9 5 maximum Connector N Type female BS ANT 65 2 X DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 100x12
141. ber of retransmission attempts before a decision is taken to revert to another server if configured or give up The range is O 5 retries The default value is 3 retries Keep Alive Timeout sec The Micro Base Station maintains a keep alive mechanism with all defined servers The Keep Alive Timeout defines the time in seconds to wait before reaching a decision that a certain server is no longer available The range is 60 180 seconds BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 105 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration x 4 5 7 2 4 5 7 2 1 106 The default value is 60 seconds NOTE When the Micro Base Station sends keep alive message to the server it uses it s own default User Name and User Password These User Name and User Password must be configured in the users list the same list used for the SUs of the server otherwise the server will response with a reject message The default User Name of the Micro Base Station is KeepAliveUserNameAndPassword The default User Password of the Micro Base Station is KeepAliveUserNameAndPassword The default User Name and User Password of the Micro Base Station are not configurable Authentication The Authentication menu enables viewing the status and parameters of defined Authentication servers adding a new server up to a maximum of two or deleting a server from the database The parameters of an existing server cannot be updated to modify the paramete
142. cable DC Resistance 1 5 Ohm Maximum IF cable Return Loss 20 dB in the 10 300 MHz band To comply with the required screening effectiveness requirement it is recommended to use double shielded cables The following table provides details on maximum length for some popular cables Table 2 2 Maximum IF Cable Length Double Shielded Cables Cable Maximum Length for AU ODU HP LMR 195 30 meters LMR 240 60 meters LMR 400 150 meters 2 1 4 Pole Mounting the ODU The ODU can be mounted on a 1 to 4 pole using one of the following options E Special clamps and threaded rods are supplied with each unit There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit enabling to use the clamps for mounting the unit on diverse pole diameters E The protrusions with grooves on the top backsides of the unit and the protrusion on the bottom backside enable the use of 9 16 wide metal bands not included with the package to secure the unit to a pole 30 Installation Installing the AU ODU NOTE x Install the unit with the bottom panel which includes the LEDs facing downward 2 1 4 1 Pole Mounting the 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP Using Clamps Figure 2 1 illustrates the method of mounting a High Power 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP on a pole using the clamps and threaded rods Ei Cy CY 9 C i V Figure 2 1 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP Pole Install
143. cated for these BE QoS Profiles legacy from previous versions the actual CT is Short Table 4 13 Pre Configured Voice Service Profiles for DRAP based Gateways Name Service VPL Priority Maximum Number Forwarding Type ID Marking Mode of Voice Calls Rule VoIP 1V Voice 18 Transparent 2 VoIP VoIP 2V Voice 18 Transparent 4 VoIP VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation taking into account the considerations described in Section 4 10 1 5 200 Operation and Administration Services Menu To properly support Call Waiting an additional connection must be available Thus the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is twice the maximum expected number of actual voice sessions Table 4 14 Pre Configured Service Profiles for Generic VolP Services Name Service VPL ID Forwarding Priority Classifier Type Rule 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 1 POTS Advanced VoIP L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 G 729 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 1 POTS Advanced VoIP L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 711 G 711 In all pre configured Service Profiles for generic VoIP services the Priority Marking Mode is set to Transparent and the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is O VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary va
144. ce is defined and transfer it with the original VLAN tag or untagged if there is no VLAN tag For transparent services VLAN Classification Mode can be set to On to enable downlink classification based on both the MAC Address and VLAN ID to support applications with multiple VLAN IDs per a single MAC address All Services assigned to the same SU must be configured with the same VLAN Classification Mode Either On or Off If VLAN Classification Mode is On only a single VLAN ID can be defined for the Service This means that the allowed combinations are E Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List includes a single VLAN ID E Hybrid VLAN Mode is On and the VLAN List is empty 162 Operation and Administration Services Menu For transparent services it is also possible to configure an Access VLAN to be used with untagged packets received on the Ethernet port of the SU This parameter is applicable only for a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to On or a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to Off and an empty VLAN list maximum of one Access VLAN can be defined per SU Hybrid VLAN Mode of operation enables classification of both tagged and untagged packets or untagged packets only according to the following rules Table 4 6 Hybrid VLAN Mode Hybrid VLAN Mode VLAN List Forwarded Packets Off Exists Only packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List VLAN List can include up to 16 entri
145. cifications rnrrrnnrrrnnornvrrnnnnnnnnnn 16 Table 1 3 Base Station 3 x GHz Antennas Electrical Specifications rrrrrnrrrrrnnonnvrnnnnnnnnnnn 17 Table 1 4 Micro Base Station IDU to AU ODU Communication asrvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnrrnnnvnnvrrnnnnnnnnnn 18 Table 1 5 Data Communication Ethernet Ports mrrnnrrnnnnrnrrrnnnnrnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnrnnnvnnnnnrnrrnnnennnnnne 18 Table 1 6 Configuration and Management rrrnnnnnvrnnnnnnnrnnnnnrvrrnnnnnnnrrennnnnvennenrnnrnnnernrrrnnsnennnnee 19 Table 1 7 Environmental Specifications mrmrnrrovvvrrannevverrrnanennnennnvnnnnnnnennnnnnanenvnnnnnnnnnennnnen 19 Table 1 8 Standards Compliance General rrrnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnnrnrrnnnnrnnrrnnnnnannnnnrnnannnnnrrnrrnnnennnnnee 20 Table 1 9 oe ee JJ 21 Table 1 10 Mechanical Specifications Micro Base Station Equipment rrrnnnnnvrvnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnn 22 Table 1 11 Electrical Specifications Micro Base Station Equipment ranrrnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnnne 22 Table 1 12 Connectors Micro Base Station Equipment arnrrrrnnnonnrrvnnnnnnvennrnnnrrnnnnrrrrrnennnnnnnne 23 Table 1 13 Micro Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications xrrrnnrnnnnnne 24 Table 1 14 Micro Base Station 3 x GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications rrnrrrnnnnnnrne 25 Table 2 1 IF Cables Requirements rrrnrnnnnnnrnnvrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnennnernanennnnrnnnnnnnnnnnne 30 Table 2 2 Maximum
146. connection there is a second level of priorities according to the Committed Time CT where connections with CT Short gets the highest priority and connections with CT Long gets the lowest priority The QoS Profile menu enables viewing all QoS Profiles in the database defining new QoS Profiles editing details of previously defined QoS Profiles and removing QoS Profiles from the database The QoS Profiles database can hold up to 255 QoS Profiles The available QoS Profile parameters depend on the QoS Type The configurable QoS Profile s parameters are QoS Profile Name A QoS Profile Name consists of 1 to 32 printable characters QoS Type The QoS Type that defines the QoS parameters that are applicable to the service The available options are 1 CG Continuous Grant 2 RT Real Time 3 NRT Non real time 4 BE Best Effort CT RT and NRT QoS Types The CT Committed Time parameter defines the time window over which the information rate is averaged to ensure compliance with the CIR or MIR parameter It is used also to prioritize bandwidth allocation to connections where for each QoS Type connections with a shorter CT get higher priority The available options are Short 50 mS Medium 100 mS and Long 200 mS For BE QoS only Short is applicable CIR RT and NRT QoS Types CIR is the information transfer rate that the system is committed to transfer under normal conditions The rate is averaged over a min
147. current release external 16 MHz clock from the GPS Adapter is not available Chain BreezeMAX enables chaining of co located Micro Base Stations to fully support intra site synchronization When two or more Micro Base Stations are chained all clocks and additional parameters required to ensure fully synchronized operation of all sectors are sent from the Master Micro Base Station to the Slave Micro Base Stations Up to four Micro Base Stations one Master and three Slave units can be chained The Chain menu includes parameters that must be shared by all Micro Base Stations belonging to the same chain where most of them should be configured only in the Master Micro Base Station they will be read only in other chained Micro Base Stations The Chain menu includes the following 4 5 3 1 6 2 1 Chain Number The Chain Number is used as a unique identifier of a chain All Micro Base Stations belonging to the same chain should be configured with the same Chain Number The Chain Number can be used by a central management system to guarantee that certain limitations are met For example in each chain one and only one Micro Base Station should be defined as Master The range is from 1 to 1500 The default is 0 indicating that a Chain Number is not configured yet A valid Chain Number must be configured and this number must be unique in the system to properly support implementation of central management of the chaining feature 4 5 3 1 6 2
148. d 11PPS signal is not detected Active GPS ODU ODU GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is ODU Outdoor E Off ODU GPS Receiver is not selected Active GPS IDU IDU GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is IDU Indoor E Off IDU GPS Receiver is not selected Active GPS INT INT GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is INT Internal Internal is not supported in current release E Off INT GPS Receiver is not selected INT CLOCK Internal clock source indication Il Green Internal 16MHz clock is ok not supported in current release E Red Internal clock is not available or clock failure 3 2 4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet verify that the Ethernet Integrity Indicator which is the yellow LED embedded in the DATA port connector is on This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment The Ethernet Activity Indicator which is the green embedded LED should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the DATA port 58 Commissioning Chapter 4 Operation and Administration In This Chapter BreezeMAX System Management on page 60 The Monitor Program on page 62 The Micro Base Station s Main Menu on page 66 Micro Base Station Menu on page 68 Radio Cluster
149. d Downlink Rx Frequency MHz The highest frequency in the range of frequencies to be scanned The available values depend on the frequency range defined by the Frequency Bands belonging to the applicable Frequency Bands Group see Section 4 7 5 and the configured Bandwidth Scanning Main Step KHz The Main Scanning Step used to define the set of Main Frequencies as described above For 2 x 3 x GHz units and a bandwidth of 3 5 MHz the range is from 125 KHz to 1750 KHz in steps of 125 KHz For 2 x 3 x GHz units and a bandwidth of 5 MHz the range is from 125 KHz to 5000 KHz in steps of 125 KHz Intermediate Scanning Steps The Intermediate Scanning Steps includes a sequence of up to 8 entries of numbers between 1 to 8 or 0 for none that define the intermediate frequencies to be scanned as described above The highest step in KHz defined by the Intermediate Scanning Steps must be smaller than the Scanning Main Step Discrete Frequencies The Discrete Frequencies menu enables viewing and editing the list of discrete frequencies that will be included in the Frequency Scanning Table The Discrete Frequencies menu includes the following options Show Select this option to view the current list of discrete frequencies if any Operation and Administration SU Menu 4 9 6 3 11 4 4 9 6 3 11 5 4 9 6 4 4 9 6 4 1 E Update List Enter a list of up to 10 discrete frequencies separated by commas no space
150. d Traps Traps Display Filter Minimum 1 Critical Info Yes Severity z Major 3 Minor 5 Info 4 Warning Traps Display Filter Days 1 31 days 31 days Yes Traps Configuration Admin 1 Disable Enable Yes Sen 2 Enable Trap Configuration Severity 1 Critical Depends on trap Yes 2 Major 3 Minor 4 Warning 5 Info Trap Configuration Suppression 0 86 400 seconds 0 no suppression Yes Interval 0 means no suppression RADIUS General Parameters Shared Secret Up to 16 printable characters case null must be Yes sensitive Available only via Monitor defined Retry Interval sec 1 5 seconds 5 seconds Yes Maximum Number of Retries 0 5 5 Yes Keep Alive Timeout sec 60 180 seconds 60 seconds Yes RADIUS Authentication up to two servers IP Address IP address null Yes UDP Port 1 65535 1812 Yes Server Status 1 Primary Yes 2 Secondary Only one server can be Primary RADIUS Accounting up to two servers IP Address IP address null Yes BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 205 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated UDP Port 1 65535 1813 Yes Server Status 1 Primary Yes 2 Secondary Only one server can be Primary Chain Chain Number 1 1500 0 not defined No yet must be defined Clock Mode 1 Master Master No 2 Redundant not applicable
151. d service provisioning using either a commercial RADIUS server or an entry level BreezeMAX Service Manager server available from Alvarion HM Centralized Service Profiles distribution to ensure location free service availability and fully controlled service provisioning HM A suite of features and support tools to enable fast and simple installation according to various business models The system operates in Time Division Duplex TDD and is currently available in the 2 3 GHz WCS 2 5 GHz MMDS and MCS 3 3 GHz and 3 5 GHzfrequency bands The actual operating frequencies used by the system can be configured according to applicable radio regulations license conditions and specific deployment considerations A BreezeMAX system comprises of the following E Customer Premise Equipment CPE BreezeMAX Subscriber Units and Alvarion s Voice Networking Gateways E Base Station BST Equipment BreezeMAX Base Station equipment including the modular Base Station and its components or the stand alone Micro Base Station uBST Outdoor Radio Units GPS Receiver and other components BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 3 Chapter 1 System Description E Networking Equipment Standard switches routers and other networking equipment supporting connections to the backbone and or Internet E Management Systems SNMP based Management Billing and Customer Care and other Operation Support Systems Figure 1 1 BreezeMAX Syste
152. dating the MAC Phy Multirate and other parameters that affect the wireless link parameters It is important to note that changes to some parameters take effect only after reset For these parameters the applicable Show menus display the Current as well as the Configured value The Configuration menu includes the following options E MAC E Phy E Multi Channel E Multirate HM Voice Parameters MAC Parameters The MAC menu enables viewing updating the following parameters Base Station ID Parameters The Operator ID Cell ID and Sector ID constitute together the Base Station ID which is the unique identifier of the uBST An SU can be authenticated by the uBST only if its defined parameters match the Base Station ID configured for the uBST The Operator ID and Cell ID are defined in the Micro Base Station menu see General Parameters Section 4 5 3 1 4 In the MAC Parameters menu they are available only in the Show option The Sector ID parameter consists of three digits in the range of 0 to 255 The default Sector ID is 0 Changes in Sector ID are applied only after reset Maximum Cell Radius The Maximum Cell Radius is used to adapt various timing parameters of the MAC to the time it takes a message to reach its destination This time delay is dependent upon the distance between the originating and receiving units The BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 121 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 122
153. devices behind the SU including Voice and Networking Gateways IP connecctivity with the managed device is needed This is possible only via the Data port Typically BreezeMAX systems will be managed using AlvariSTAR or another SNMP based network management system Operation and Administration BreezeMAX System Management This chapter describes how to manage the system using the Monitor application For information on managing the system using AlvariSTAR refer to the Applicable AlvariSTAR documentation NOTE Ed To enable remote management using SNMP and or Telnet the parameters of the applicable port MGMT and or DATA must first be configured via the MON port For details on the applicable parameters refer to Section 4 5 3 2 Management Port and Section 4 5 3 3 Data Port BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 61 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 The Monitor Program 4 2 1 Accessing the Monitor Program gt To access the Monitor program via the MON connector 1 Use the Monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the Micro Base Station to the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC The COM port connector on the Monitor cable is a 9 pin D type plug 2 Runa terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminalTM 3 Set the communication parameters as shown in the following table 62 Table 4 1 COM Port Configuration Parameter Value Baud Rate 9600 Data
154. e Identifier and Acct Delay have been updated as well as those in which they remain the same Response The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server Malformed Responses The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or unknown types are not included Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets containing invalid authenticators received from this server Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This counter is incremented when an Accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well asa timeout A send to a different server is counted as an Accounting Request as well as a timeout Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for a
155. e in all frequencies according to the frequencies defined in the Frequency Scanning menu and in all available antennas according to the local definition in the SU as indicated by the Antenna Selection parameter in the Show menu of the SU Each of the AUs Micro Base Stations with which the SU can communicate perform initial phase of network entry is given a quality mark based on the quality of the signal at which it is received by the SU for each of the relevant antennas At the end of the scanning period the SU reaches a Best BST AU decision according to the information gathered The AU Micro Base Station with the highest quality mark is selected as the Best BST AU and the SU will immediately try to associate with it using the relevant frequency and antenna The range used for scanning is defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask parameters of the SU The initial range can be limited by defining a preferred range of BST AU IDs and selecting the best AU Micro Base Station in the BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 147 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration preferred range If no AU Micro Base Station is found in the preferred range the SU will scan the entire range The Best BST AU Parameters menu includes the following options 4 9 6 3 10 1 Show The Show option enables viewing the following Best BST AU Support Preferred BST AU ID Preferred BST AU ID Mask Selected BST AU ID Selected Downlink Rx F
156. e Management port defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters must differ from the local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters and from the local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 87 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 2 5 4 5 3 2 5 1 4 5 3 2 6 88 Auto Negotiation Option The Management port of the uBST can be configured to operate with Auto Negotiation Option enabled or disabled The default is Enabled When the Auto Negotiation Option is enabled the Speed and Duplex parameter in the relevant Show menus displays the detected operation mode When the Auto Negotiation Option is disabled the Speed and Duplex parameter in the relevant Show menus displays the configured operation mode Upon selection of the Disable option the user is prompted to select the speed and duplex Select Link Speed and Duplex This option is applicable only when the Auto Negotiation Option is disabled The available options are 10 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex and 100 Mbps Full Duplex Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable The Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter allows enabling disabling remote management traffic via a router connected to
157. e allocate to it a total bandwidth of 31 2 x 1 5 46 8 Kbps equivalent to a Packet Size of 936 bits or 117 bytes The SU may BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 1 POTS Basic VolP G 729 Service Profile request twice this BW so it will be allocated with up to approximately 94 Kbps This is assumed to be sufficient for all traffic scenarios including Call Waiting Thus the CG 47 QoS Profile parameters are E Packet Size 117 bytes E Sample Interval 20 msec BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 231 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B23 Pil Budet B 3 3 B 3 4 232 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 729 Service Profile Service Characteristics M G 729 codec 20msec sample interval E 1 POTS E T 38 Fax E DSCP priority marking behind the SU is used with the following values 63 RTP traffic 26 RTCP and VolP traffic 0 Data traffic E Single media stream to support Call Waiting Voice RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth for a G 729 call 8 Kbps codec bit rate with RTP and 20 bytes of voice payload is Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 20 bytes 78 bytes Total packet size bits 78 bytes 8 bits per byte 624 bits PPS Packets Per Second 8 Kbps codec bit rate 160 bits 50 pps Note 160 bits 20 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call
158. e following options are available in all submenus of the Services menu Show All Select this option to see the current details of all entities in the applicable submenu Subscribers Services etc Show by This option enables selecting an entity by a specific identifier such as Name or MAC Address Select this option and enter the appropriate parameter s value to access the menu for a selected entity This will enable you to choose from the following options BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 165 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 3 3 4 10 3 4 4 10 3 5 4 10 4 166 HM Show Select this option to view the details of the selected entity HM Update Select this option to edit the details of the selected entity E Delete Select this option to remove the selected entity from the database Show List Select this option to view all defined entities in the applicable submenu sorted by the entity type ID Subscriber ID Service ID etc The entity ID is an identifier attached automatically to each new entity You can select a specific entity by its ID This will open the Selected Entity menu with the Show Update and Delete options described above Select Select this option to select an entity by its Name This will open the Selected Entity menu with the Show Update and Delete options described above Add Select this option to add a new entity to the database The Services Menu The
159. e unit To view the current NPU uBST SW Versions in the unit Select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Show Versions BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 223 Appendix A Software Upgrade gt To view the current NPU uBST SW Versions in the unit Select SU AU gt SW Files in NPU uBST gt Show Files 224 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Completing the Software Upgrade Switching Versions A 3 Completing the Software Upgrade Switching Versions After verifying successful upload of all software files set the new version as the main version in each one of the upgraded system elements HM SU s Select the SU that should be upgraded Select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Set as Main and enter the new SU SW Version The unit will reset automatically and will use the new version after power up Repeat the process for all SUs that should be upgraded AU s Select the AU that should be upgraded Select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Set as Main and enter the new AU SW Version The unit will reset automatically After power up the unit will use the new version Repeat the process for all AUs that should be upgraded NPU uBST Select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Run from Shadow The system will reset automatically After power up the NPU uBST will run from the new version that at this stage is still marked as the Shadow Version To switch versio
160. eMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 191 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration The range is 1 65535 The default port number is 5060 4 10 4 12 1 6Statistics 4 10 4 12 2 The Statistics option enables viewing or resetting the PF Listener Counter that indicates the total number of packets received from unknown servers s since the last reset Policy Function Servers The Policy Function Servers menu enables viewing the status and parameters of defined Policy Function servers updating the parameters of a server adding a new server or deleting a server from the database The Policy Function Servers menu includes the following options E Show All E Add Server HM Select Server 4 10 4 12 2 1Show All Select this option to view the current status and parameters of all defined Policy Function servers For each defined server the following details are displayed E IP Address E UDP Port E VLAN ID 4 10 4 12 2 2Add Server Select this option to define a new Policy Function server Up to 255 Policy Function servers can be defined You will be prompted to configure the following parameters 4 10 4 12 2 2 1IP Address 192 The IP address of the Policy Function server The default is null IP address must be defined Refer to the limitations described in IP Addresses Configuration on page 65 Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 4 12 2 2 2UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number us
161. ected BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 89 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Ed 4 5 3 3 3 4 5 3 3 4 4 5 3 3 5 4 5 3 3 5 1 90 NOTE The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters must differ from the local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters and from the subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via the Management port defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters Data Port Gateway The IP address of the default Gateway for the Data port The default is 0 0 0 0 meaning no default gateway Refer to the limitations described in IP Addresses Configuration on page 65 except to the default 0 0 0 0 address that is permitted as it means no gateway Data Port Management VLAN This parameter defines the VLAN ID for management frames via the Data port Ifa value from 0 to 4094 is configured for the Management VLAN ID then the device will accept management frames only if their VLAN tag is the same as this value Available values are 0 4094 or null empty for No VLAN The default is null No VLAN CAUTION The Data Port Management VLAN is updated in run time without reset Auto Negotiation Option The Data port of the uBST can be configured to operate with Auto Negotiation Option e
162. ection 4 10 1 5 for guidelines regarding VLAN ID configuration 4 10 4 3 1 6 Hybrid VLAN Mode Hybrid VLAN Mode of operation enables classification of both tagged and untagged packets or untagged packets only according to the following rules Table 4 7 Hybrid VLAN Mode Hybrid VLAN Mode VLAN List Forwarded Packets Off Exists Only packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List VLAN List can include up to 16 entries Empty All both untagged and tagged with any VLAN ID On Exists Untagged packets and packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List VLAN List can include up to 15 entries Empty Only untagged frames Note that for each Service Type a maximum of one Service that enables forwarding of untagged packets can be assigned to an SU Forwarding of untagged packets is supported when either Hybrid VLAN Mode is On or Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List is empty It is not possible to define for the same SU two Services of the same Service Type that enable forwarding of untagged packets However the same SU and untagged packets can be associated with two Services of different Service Types provided one of them is a PPPoE Service the combinations L2 and Voice L2 and Managed VoIP Voice and Managed VoIP are forbidden 4 10 4 3 1 7 VLAN Classification Mode The VLAN Classification feature enables using VLAN ID in addition to destination MAC address for classi
163. ed Quick Yes 2 Quick Default L2 Voice Managed VolP Name of an existing L2 or Voice or Internet Access Yes Service Profile Managed VoIP Service Profile or None L2 Default PPPoE Service Profile Name of an existing PPPoE Service None Yes Profile or None Services Subscribers Parameters Subscriber Name 1 to 32 printable characters Must be Yes unique in the network First Name Up to 50 printable characters Yes Last Name Up to 50 printable characters Yes Description Up to 50 printable characters Yes Admin Status 1 Disabled Yes 2 Enabled Servics Services Parameters Service Name 1 to 32 printable characters Yes Subscriber Name A Subscriber Name 1 to 32 printable Yes characters that exists in the database SU MAC Address MAC Address of an SU that exists in the Yes database Service Profile Name A Service Profile Name 1 to 32 Yes printable characters that exists in the database VLAN List A list of different numbers separated by Yes commas where each entry is from 1 to 4094 Null is for No VLAN Up to 16 entries when Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off Up to 15 entries when Hybrid VLAN Mode is On Hybrid VLAN Mode 1 Off Yes 2 On VLAN Classification Mode 1 Off Yes 2 On Access VLAN 1 4094 Yes BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 215 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary
164. ed SW File in all Permanent SUs served by the Micro Base Station BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 155 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 10 1 4 10 1 1 156 Services Menu Introduction to Services Services Subscribers and Service Profiles A Service is a virtual connection between a Subscriber s application and the Network Resource The Network Resource could be Internet Content Provider Corporate Network etc The Services are implemented as IEEE 802 16 connections within the wireless domain Each Service can include up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink connections Implementation within the provider s backbone domain depends on the specific backbone network A Subscriber is an entity that may be associated with any number of devices connected to any number of SUs Each Service associates a certain Service Profile with Subscriber s device s behind a specific SU NOTE The Subscriber entity is not applicable when Services are provisioned using a RADIUS server The Service Profile s properties depend on the Service Type All data Services have the following properties E VLAN ID based Classification Each Service can be associated with up to 16 VLAN IDs enabling creation of VLANs within the wireless domain and differentiation of services to different end users behind the same SU based on VLAN ID classification Quality of Service QoS and Priority based Classification Up to 4 uplink and 4 do
165. ed and processed At a later circuit stage the IF signal is converted up to the transmission frequency band Internet Protocol The standard that defines how data is transmitted over the Internet IP bundles data including e mail faxes voice calls and messages and other types into packets in order to transmit it over public and private networks Security Architecture for IP Network IP Control Protocol IPCP and IPv6 Control Protocol IPsec provides security services at the IP layer by enabling a system to select required security protocols determine the algorithm s to use for the service s and put in place any cryptographic keys required to provide the requested services IPsec can be used to protect one or more paths between a pair of hosts between a pair of security gateways or between a security gateway and a host Internet Service Provider International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications An intergovernmental organization through which public and private organizations develop telecommunications The ITU was founded in 1865 and became a United Nations agency in 1947 It is responsible for adopting international treaties regulations and standards governing telecommunications The standardization functions were formerly performed by a group within the ITU called CCITT but after a 1992 reorganization the CCITT no longer exists as a separate entity BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Glossary
166. ed by the Policy Function server for receiving messages from the Micro Base Station Valid values 1 to 65535 4 10 4 12 2 2 3VLAN ID The VLAN ID used for communication with the Policy Function server Valid values are 0 4094 or null for no VLAN ID 4 10 4 12 2 2 4Shared Secret Shared Secret is the key used for encrypting the user s credentials in the messages between the Micro Base Station and the Policy Function For security reasons the Shared Secret is displayed as a series of asterisks and when defining it for the first time or updating it the user is prompted to re enter the new Shared Secret for confirmation The Shared Secret comprises a string of 1 to 16 printable characters 4 10 4 12 2 3Select Server This option enables selecting an existing Policy Function Server for viewing its status and parameters updating its definition deleting it from the database or viewing its Statistics counters The selection is based on the server s IP address The available options are 4 10 4 12 2 3 1Show Select this option to display current status and parameters of the server For information on displayed details refer to Section 4 10 4 12 2 1 4 10 4 12 2 3 2Delete Select this option to delete the server from the database 4 10 4 12 2 3 3Update Select this option to update the parameters of the server the IP Address cannot be changed 4 10 4 12 2 3 4Statistics Select this option to display or reset the Statistics
167. ed number since the last time the counters were reset For each direction uplink downlink the displayed information includes the following statistics for each rate E Total Burst E Error Bursts E Error Rate The counters are reset each time the SU is reset or upon activating the Reset option Operation and Administration SU Menu 4 9 6 5 4 9 6 6 4 9 7 4 9 8 Show MAC Addresses Behind SU Select this option to view a list of the MAC Addresses of the devices behind the SU If VLAN behind the SU is used the VLAN ID used by each device is displayed next to its MAC Address Delete This option enables deleting the selected SU from the database Only disconnected Out of Service SUs can be deleted Add New SU Select the Add New SU option to add a new SU to the database The Add New SU sub menu includes the following parameters SU MAC Address SW File Name The SW File to be used by the SU Should be either a File Name known to exist in the SU or an SU SW File Name in the uBST Operation The action to be performed with the specified SW File after the SU connects to the Micro Base Station None Download Run from Shadow or Set as Main A new SU that attempts to communicate with the base station when the base station operates in Advanced Mode will be registered only if its MAC address exists in the database Clear All Configured SU SW Files Select this option to clear delete the Configur
168. eeeddanen Aeaemumianeaseeceestvets 58 Table 4 1 COM Port Configuration rrrronnnnnrnrrrnnonnnrrnnnnnnnvnnnvrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnrnnnsennnnnne 62 Table 4 2 Default PasswordS smaa csacataecancea ace saccdes eadetedeet teas att 72 Table 4 3 Frequency Baris i uasvnmmmnmnnsietennisnekteenta oconsdnednsocesanseassscecdsetaddevacstecsenenabnags 119 Table 4 4 Rates Modulation Schemes and Coding ccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeees 127 Table 4 5 Scanning Intermediate Steps rrrnrnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnrnrrnnnanannennrrnnnnnnnnennn 150 Table 4 6 Hybrid VLAN Mode 2 ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeceaeeeseaeeeceaeesseneeesaeesseneeeeeaeesseeseenaees 163 Table 4 7 Hybrid VLAN Mode cccccccecceseececeeeseeeeeeeeeeecaeeesaeeceeeseeeecaeeeseeseaeecaeeseeeenseeeaseeaas 170 Table 4 8 Priority Marking Values Qussedtsessnsmmnsuimtjsuheenundaneltmakneaifenilunil 178 Table 4 9 Pre Configured Data Service Profiles rrrrrrnrrrnnnnnnvrvnnnnnnrnnnnnrnrrnnnnornnrnnnennnnnnnerenr 198 Table 4 10 Pre Configured Forwarding Rules for Data ServiCe ecccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeees 199 Table 4 11 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Data Services rrrrnnrrnrrrnnnnnnvvnnnrrnnrrnnrrnnnr 200 Table 4 12 Pre Configured QoS Profiles for Data Services wrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnrrrvrrrrnrnrnnerrrrrrrnnnnnn 200 Table 4 13 Pre Configured Voice Service Profiles for DRAP
169. efficiency levels without causing or receiving degradation due to unintentional EMI Electro Magnetic Interference EMC generally encompasses all of the electromagnetic disciplines European Telecommunications Standards Institute A non profit organization producing voluntary telecommunications standards used throughout Europe some of which have been adopted by the EC as the technical base for Directives or Regulations BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 241 Glossary FCC FDD FEC FFT FTP G 711 G 723 1 G 729 GPS H 323 242 Federal Communications Commission A U S government agency that supervises licenses and controls electronic and electromagnetic transmission standards Frequency Division Duplex Full duplex operation by using a pair of frequencies one for transmission and one for reception Forward Error Correction A method of communicating data that can corrects errors in transmission on the receiving end Prior to transmission the data is put through a predetermined algorithm that adds extra bits specifically for error correction to any character or code block If the transmission is received in error the correction bits are used to check and repair the data Fast Fourier Transform An algorithm for converting data from the time domain to the frequency domain often used in signal processing File Transfer Protocol A protocol for exchanging files over the Internet FTP uses
170. ency 125 KHz Start Frequency 500 KHz Start Frequency N Main Step Start Frequency N Main Step 125 KHz Start Frequency N Main Step 500 KHz N 1 2 End Frequency is the upper limit for the scanned frequencies The Frequency Scanning menu enables viewing and updating the scanning range parameters It also enables viewing the current set of discrete frequencies if exist as defined in the SU In the current release discrete frequencies can be defined modified only locally at the SU The Frequency Scanning menu includes the following options 4 9 6 3 11 2 1Show The Show option enables viewing the following E Start Downlink Rx Frequency MHz E End Downlink Rx Frequency MHz E Scanning Main Step E Scanning Intermediate Steps Configured E Scanning Intermediate Steps Actual BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 151 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Discrete Frequencies or No discrete frequency configured 4 9 6 3 11 2 2Update 4 9 6 3 11 3 152 The Update menu enables configuration of the following parameters changes in Frequency Scanning parameters take effect only after reset Start Downlink Rx Frequency MHz The lowest frequency in the range of frequencies to be scanned The available values depend on the frequency range defined by the Frequency Bands belonging to the applicable Frequency Bands Group see Section 4 7 5 and the configured Bandwidth En
171. er ID 1 4 Yes Name Up to 32 printable characters Null Yes Location 1 to 255 printable characters Null Yes Sector Heading 0 359 degrees 0 Yes Sector Beam Width 0 359 degrees 90 Yes ODU Parameters ODU ID 1 4 Yes Associated Radio Cluster 1 4 Yes must be a defined Radio cluster ID Configured ODU Frequency Band According to loaded Frequency Bands 0 Not Defined Yes file 208 Operation and Administration Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Tx Power dBm 13 50 dBm in increments of 0 25 Actual range depends on ODU Type 3 5 GHz units 24 to 34 dBm 2 x GHz units with HC08 version 134 25 to 36 dBm 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 137 30 to 36 dBm 28 Yes Admin Status 1 Disable 2 Enable Disable Yes Access Parameters MAC Sector ID 0 255 0 No ARQ Enable Disable 1 Disable 2 Enable not supported in version 4 0 2 Disable No Maximum Cell Radius km Bandwidth 3 5 MHz 10 50 km Bandwidth 5 MHz 7 45 km 20 km No Access Parameters Phy Bandwidth MHz 1 1 75 2 3 5 3 5 4 7 5 10 Only values supported by the unit will be accepted 3 5 No Access Parameters Multi Channel Diversity Mode 1 No Diversity 2 Second Order Diversity 3 Fourth Order Diversity for NLOS 4 Fou
172. er Name The User Name can only be configured locally in the SU SU Name The default User Name given to a new SU during the definition process see Section 4 9 7 is SU lt SU s MAC Address gt An SU that is added to the database is added as Permanent When an SU that exists in the database as a Permanent SU is registered it receives services based on its MAC address and the default User Name is replaced by the name configured in the SU A Micro Base Station cannot serve two SUs with the same User Name Upon identifying an SU with a User Name that is identical to that of a previously registered SU the new SU will be registered to enable management but will not receive any services Its name in the BST database will be changed to SU lt SU s MAC Address gt The system administrator will be informed of the problem through the Fault Status parameter in any of the relevant Show menus Fault Status 2 and through a trap message rbSuDuplicateName trap If the administrator decides that the SU is legitimate and should receive services a new User Name must be configured in the SU The SU will receive services only after configuring it with a User Name that is unique in the Micro Base Station s database Organization Name The Organization Name configured in the SU Address The Address configured in the SU Country The Country name configured in the SU MAC Standard FDD Parameters The SU MAC menu enables viewing updating the MAC p
173. er to enable or disable sending of traps to the Authorized Manager Read Community The SNMP Read Community to be used by the Authorized Manager A null Read Community means that the read get operation can only be performed using the Write Community Valid Community strings Up to 23 printable characters case sensitive Write Community The SNMP Write Community to be used by the Authorized Manager A null Write Community means that the Authorized Manager has Read only access rights Valid Community strings Up to 23 printable characters case sensitive Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 3 5 4 5 3 6 Ed 4 5 3 7 Bridge The Bridge submenu enables configuring the Bridge Aging Time parameter setting the aging time for all addresses in the Forwarding Data Base The available values are from 1 to 1440 minutes or 0 for no aging The default is 10 minutes Voice The Voice submenu enables configuring the DRAP TTL Retries parameter This parameter sets the limit of TTL retries for gateways that support the DRAP protocol before concluding that the gateway is no longer active and removing it from the database The TTL retry time the maximum time between two consecutive Allocation Requests is 255 seconds The range is from 1 to 100 The default is 4 NOTE During SW download to a gateway which may take up to almost 15 minutes under worst conditions the DRAP protocol is not active If
174. ere is a Service with Hybrid VLAN Mode On is assigned to the SU BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 163 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 2 164 The combination of VLAN Transparency Service On Hybrid VLAN Mode Off and an empty VLAN List means that all packets are forwarded This combination should be used only if the Service Provider can ensure that there will not be conflicts between VLAN IDs used by devices behind the SU and existing VPL IDs To avoid conflicts a transparent Service Profile cannot be assigned to a Service if the Service s VLAN ID list includes a VLAN ID that is equal to any of the already assigned VPL IDs The combination VLAN Transparency Mode On Hybrid VLAN Mode On and an empty VLAN List means that only untagged frames should be forwarded Such a Service cannot be assigned if there is an assigned non transparent Service with VPL ID None Introduction to Filtering Features The Filtering features allow a network operator to control the traffic in the system by forwarding or discarding packets according to a set of rules based on multiple allow deny criteria This provides both improved network security and better utilization of the wireless medium The filtering is done at the base station controlling the traffic between the network and the wireless link The filtering features enable Filtering packets arriving from the network interface From Network Filtering using a
175. ers C Any subnet reachable via the Gateway of the Management port if defined Note that in this case the Static Route if defined is ignored and the defined Gateway becomes the default Gateway enabling remote management by any PC reachable via the Gateway If remote management is enabled for both the Data Port and the Management port then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager A The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters B The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters C Any subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port if Data Port Gateway is defined D The remote Static Route subnet defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters reachable via the Gateway of the Management port NOTE To prevent the undesired situation where remote management traffic is unintentionally disabled in both the Management and Data ports the Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter will be automatically forced to Enabled upon disabling the Data Port Management Traffic and vice versa The Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter is available only in the Monitor program It is not available when using SNMP BreezeMAX Micro Base
176. es Empty All both untagged and tagged with any VLAN ID On Exists Untagged packets and packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List VLAN List can include up to 15 entries Empty Only untagged frames The guidelines that should be followed when defining VLAN IDs and related parameters are E A specific VLAN ID behind a certain SU can be associated only with a single Service of a certain Service Type It is not possible to define two Services of the same Service Type for the same SU and VLAN ID However the same SU and VLAN ID can be associated with two Services of different Service Types provided one of them is a PPPoE Service the combinations L2 and Voice L2 and Managed VoIP Voice and Managed VoIP are forbidden E For each Service Type a maximum of one Service that enables forwarding of untagged packets can be assigned to an SU Forwarding of untagged packets is supported when either Hybrid VLAN Mode is On or Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List is empty It is not possible to define for the same SU two Services of the same Service Type that enable forwarding of untagged packets However the same SU and untagged packets can be associated with two Services of different Service Types provided one of them is a PPPoE Service the combinations L2 and Voice L2 and Managed VoIP Voice and Managed VoIP are forbidden E The maximum total number of VLAN IDs behind the same SU is 16 15 when th
177. es including Internet access via IP or PPPoE tunneling VPNs and Voice over IP Service recognition and multiple classifiers that can be used for generating various service profiles enable operators to offer differentiated SLAs with committed QoS for each service profile BreezeMAX offers an innovative solution for a Self Install CPE including all the features embedded capabilities and supplementary tools that support easy installation by a non professional user and fully automated network entry authentication and services provisioning The elements that enable and support the Self Install solution include E 4 channel Access Unit and high power radios at the Base Station m 279 or 4 order transmit diversity at the Base Station System Description Introducing BreezeMAX m 4 order receive diversity at the Base Station using Maximum Receive Ratio Combining MRRC E Uplink sub channels using OFDMA 16 for increased service efficiency and improved link budget E A high power CPE with an integral antenna array providing 360 degrees coverage with smart selection of Tx and Rx antennas An optional wall window mounted antenna to extend the coverage area E Automatic frequency scanning and best Access Unit Base Station selection algorithms in the CPE E Enhanced Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC and dynamic rate selection multirate optimized for multiple sub channels in the uplink E Centralized CPE authentication an
178. es the Hold Over timeout after which there might be interferences to other sectors When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is enabled transmissions will stop after this timeout When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is disabled this timeout is used to generate a trap indicating that there might be interferences to neighboring sectors The range is from 0 to 2880 minutes The default is 30 minutes GPS Info The GPS Info menu displays read only information received from the GPS receiver when available Currently this information is available only from the Outdoor GPS Receiver The displayed details include E Number Of Received Satellites The number of satellites received by the GPS receiver For proper operation at least four satellites should be received E Longitude The longitude as calculated by the GPS receiver The format is lt xx Deg yy yyy Min A gt where xx is the longitude in degrees yy yyy is in minutes decimal format and A is either N North or S South For example 42 Deg 06 512 Min N E Latitude The latitude as calculated by the GPS receiver The format is xx Deg yy yyy Min B where xx is the latitude in degrees yy yyy is in minutes decimal format and B is either E East or W West For example 024 Deg 25 290 Min E E Altitude The altitude in meters as calculated by the GPS receiver For example 00048 M HM Calculated Local Date and Time The local date and time using 24 hours clock as
179. ese sessions Upon provisioning of such a service the system automatically handles Signaling and RTP connections establishment including QoS issues Appropriate connections are established to satisfy to actual demand according to session status and required bandwidth In a Voice Forwarding Rule Unicast and Multicast Relaying are always enabled packets with Unknown Address are always forwarded DRAP Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol is a protocol between the Gateway installed behind the Subscriber Unit and the base station The protocol provides an auto discovery mechanism for the Gateway so that no specific configuration is needed and the Gateway can automatically locate and register with the base station The protocol uses a few simple messages enabling a Voice Gateway to request resources when calls are made and the base station to dynamically allocate them Using the DRAP solution has the following advantages E Maintain telephony toll quality over the wireless network dynamically allocate Continuous Grant CG connections for active calls maintaining the QoS and low jitter needed for toll quality voice services Bandwidth is allocated according to actual requirements of each call taking into account the Codec s type and sampling rate being used E Allocate CG bandwidth only for the duration of the call the air resources are allocated and released according to the DRAP messages which are based on the VoIP signaling This
180. eserved RFC 1700 E BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 65 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 66 The Micro Base Station s Main Menu The Main menu of the Micro Base Station uBST Monitor program includes the following options 1 Micro Base Station 2 Radio Cluster 3 ODU 4 Access Parameters 5 SU 6 Services X Exit Following is a description of the menu items and the options available in each of the menu items Micro Base Station Menu The Micro Base Station menu enables viewing general unit s details viewing and configuring unit s parameters managing the SW versions and viewing ports traffic counters For more details refer to Section 4 5 Radio Cluster Menu The Radio Cluster menu enables viewing the details of existing Radio Clusters defining new Radio Clusters updating the parameters of an existing Radio Cluster and deleting a Radio Cluster from the database For details refer to Section 4 6 ODU Menu The ODU menu enables viewing the status and configuration details of existing ODUs configuring the parameters of new ODUs including pre configuration of ODUs that are not yet installed updating the parameters of existing ODUs and deleting ODUs from the database For details refer to Section 4 7 Access Parameters Menu The Access Parameters menu enables viewing and configuring MAC Phy Multirate and other parameters that affect the w
181. esesersunnaaaaersesuseenaasengons 10 1 3 1 DUET 6004 Access Gateway mrmrnnvnonnnnnvnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvennnnnnvnnnennnnenerennnnnnnnnnnnen 10 Co yee foo 6 C1 anann nannnnn nanaman nnnm n ennnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nenna 11 JE ad oo cecccscssssesssesesnesennessesesenscsnesensessnessenessesessessanenensessesesenseseesess 11 LE SA LER oon ienulaeenaanaaaianeailand 12 1 4 3 BreezeMAX Service Manager rrrnnrnnnnrnnrnnnnnrnnrrnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnnnnrnnennnnenne 13 0 Ea E 14 BME PAGO EEE 14 1 5 2 2 X GHz Antennas OOUONAl c cispeiseccsi iecenateletlrancadieedeiared Gee eeaceecs 16 1 5 3 3 x GHz Antennas Optional arannvnnnnnnnvonnnnrrrrnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnrnnrrnnnannnnene 17 1 5 4 Micro Base Station IDU to AU ODU Communication 18 1 5 5 Data Communication Ethernet Ports cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeees 18 1 5 6 Configuration and Management nevavsaetmmmmesmnminsmnusveeitnunknsivuie 19 1 5 7 FN 19 1 5 8 Standards Compliance General n u mesesreeemsensmierinnsreenmnnen ude 20 159 Seneste 21 Contents 1 5 10 Physical and Beads 22 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 1 Installing the FO sa ci ccc wees eet capac reese ie eee cece teste ae ncexs cemeeae 28 2 1 1 AU ODU Installation Requirements rrvrnnannvvnnnnnnnvnnnnvrrrrnnnennrrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnenr 28 2 1 2 Guidelines for Positioning the AU ODU ranrnnrvnnannnnvnnnrnnrnnnnnrrnrrnnennnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrr 29
182. eset the SU and reboot using the Shadow version and then swap the Main and Shadow SW Version so that the running version which was previously the Shadow version will become the Main version to be used after next reset If the specified file already exists as the running version and it is defined as the Shadow version meaning that previously a Download and Run from Shadow operation was executed for this file name the only actual operation to take place will be to swap the Main and Shadow versions If it is already defined as the Main version no action will take place 4 9 6 3 Configuration The SU Configuration menu enables viewing and updating the SU s parameters The Configuration menu includes the following options Registration MAC Standard FDD applicable only to 3 x GHz SUs Phy Standard FDD applicable only to 3 x GHz SUs Multirate and ATPC Voice Networking Gateways Ethernet Port Installer Password Bridging Parameters License Best BST AU Advanced Si BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 141 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 6 3 1 4 9 6 3 1 1 4 9 6 3 1 2 4 9 6 3 1 3 4 9 6 3 1 4 4 9 6 3 2 142 E Radio Parameters Advanced Si Registration Parameters The SU Registration Parameters option in the BST Monitor enables viewing the SU s Registration parameters Registration parameters can be configured only locally at the SU via the Ethernet USB port Us
183. eter will take effect only after resetting the SU The available values depend on the HW of the SU and the configured Bandwidth for Standard operation mode Multirate and ATPC Parameters The Multirate and ATPC mechanism are controlled by the uBST except to the option to temporarily control them locally at the SU for testing purposes The Show Multirate and ATPC Status and Parameters option enables viewing the current status of the applicable parameters The Set Rates option can be used to set uplink and downlink rates per SU only when Multirate is disabled Show The Show option enables viewing the current status of the following parameters E Uplink RSSI dBm E Uplink SNR dB E Uplink Rate E Downlink RSSI dBm E Downlink SNR dB E Downlink Rate E ATPC Support E Tx Power dBm Set Rates The Set Rates option is available only when the Multirate algorithm is disabled in the uBST see Section 4 8 4 allowing to set the Uplink Current Rate and the Downlink Current Rate to any of the values listed in Table 4 4 Operation and Administration SU Menu 4 9 6 3 5 4 9 6 3 6 4 9 6 3 6 1 The defaults are the last rates used by the Multirate algorithm before it was disabled For SUs that join the cell when the Multirate algorithm is disabled the defaults are the applicable Basic Rates Voice Networking Gateways The Voice Networking Gateways option enables viewing details on the Voice Networking Gateways c
184. eters E Authentication E Accounting General Parameters The General Parameters menu enables viewing and modifying parameters that affect the communication with all RADIUS servers These parameters include HM Shared Secret Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 7 1 1 4 5 7 1 2 4 5 7 1 3 4 5 7 1 4 E Retry Interval sec E Maximum Number of Retries E Keep Alive Timeout sec Shared Secret Shared Secret is the key used for encrypting the User name and Password in the messages to the RADIUS server s For security and control reasons the Shared Secret is displayed as a series of asterisks and when defining it for the first time or updating it the user is prompted to re enter the new Shared Secret for confirmation NOTE For security reasons the Shared Secret does not change after performing the Set Factory Defaults operation For the same reason the Shared Secret cannot be configured using SNMP and it is not included in backup configuration files Valid Shared Secret Up to 16 printable characters case sensitive The default Shared Secret is null Shared Secret must be defined Retry Interval sec The Retry Interval parameter defines the time in seconds to wait before retransmitting a RADIUS message if no response is received The range is 1 5 seconds The default value is 5 seconds Maximum Number of Retries The Maximum Number of Retries parameter defines the maximum num
185. eters reachable via the Gateway of the Management port NOTE To prevent the undesired situation where remote management traffic is unintentionally disabled in both the Management and Data ports the Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter will be automatically forced to Enabled upon disabling the Management Port Management Traffic and vice versa The Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter is available only in the Monitor program It is not available when using SNMP Data Port Parameters These parameters define the IP and Ethernet parameters for the Data DATA port connecting the uBST to the backbone The Ethernet interface of the MGMT port in the uBST can be configured to operate either using Auto Negotiation or at a fixed speed duplex mode enabling selection between 10 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex or 100 Mbps Full Duplex Data Port IP Address The IP address of the Data port The default is 1 1 1 3 Refer to the limitations described in IP Addresses Configuration on page 65 Data Port Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the Data port The default is 255 255 255 0 In a binary representation 32 bits the string must comprise a series of contiguous binary 1 s starting from the MSB followed by a series of contiguous binary O s 0 0 0 0 all zeros meaning nothing and 255 255 255 255 all ones meaning this address only are illegal and will be rej
186. etwork and the Action to be taken with this file 4 9 6 2 6 1 Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SU after network entry Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the uBST or None null 4 9 6 2 6 2 Action The operation to be performed with the SW File after network entry of the SU None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main HM None Select None to cancel a pending request for another operation an operations will be executed only after the next reset E Download Select this option to download a specified SW file from the uBST to the Shadow memory of the SU If the specified file already exists in the SU no action will take place E Run from Shadow Select this option to download a specified SW file from the uBST to the Shadow memory of the SU reset the SU and reboot using the Shadow version Note that because the process is controlled by the uBST the SU will continue running from the Shadow version after reset 140 Operation and Administration SU Menu If the specified file already exists as the Shadow version meaning that previously a Download operation was executed for this file name the only actual operation to take place will be to reset and run from Shadow If the specified file is the current Main version no action will take place Set as Main Select this option to download a specified SW file from the uBST to the Shadow memory of the SU r
187. etwork wide QoS and enable the upstream network to handle the traffic accordingly Within the BreezeMAX system frames can be classified to QoS classes using Priority Classifiers based on either a DSCP header or 802 1p tag This applies only in cases where an BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 175 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration external networking device marks the applicable fields BreezeMAX also enables marking data transmitted to the backbone network with either DSCP or 802 1p values where the marking is done per Service Profile This marking overrides marking performed by external devices behind the SU Typically Priority Marking by the uBST will be used in the following cases The external networking equipment behind the SU does not use priority marking The service provider does not trust the priority marking defined by the user s equipment The service provider uses a priority marking type DSCP or 802 1p that differs from the one used by the user s networking equipment The system supports three marking modes 1 2 176 Transparent Marking Mode No Priority Marking In this case the system should forward the frames to the uplink network without any changes If 802 1p classification is used at the SU the frames will be transmitted to the operator s network according to the following rules If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off the frames will be forwarded with their original 802 1p value
188. evant SU s details User Name and Password and their corresponding services see Defining RADIUS Based Services on page 197 4 When an SU attempt registering at the Micro Base Station the Micro Base Station searches within its local database whether this is a Permanent SU defined in the database by its MAC Address Ifthe Micro Base Station recognizes the SU as a Permanent one it provides the Local Permanent Services as defined in the Micro Base Station s local database see Defining Local Permanent Services on page 196 Ifthe SU is not defined as Permanent in the Micro Base Station s database the Micro Base Station queries the RADIUS server for SU authentication and service provisioning 5 The RADIUS server searches for the corresponding Service defined for the SU based on the User Name and Password Ifit finds the applicable service s the RADIUS server replies to the Micro Base Station with the Service parameters Service Profile Name VLAN List BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 103 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 7 1 104 Access VLAN Configuration VLAN Transparency Mode Option and VLAN Classification Mode Ifthe RADIUS server does not find matching SU s credentials or defined service s it replies to the Micro Base Station with a reject message 6 According to the response from the RADIUS server the Micro Base Station either authenticates the SU and
189. f PF packets of which were received from this server and were dropped for any reason Voice Domain The Voice Domain menu enables viewing the parameters of defined Voice Domains adding a new Voice Domain updating the definition of a Voice Domain or deleting a Voice Domain from the database The Voice Domain menu includes the following options E Show All Operation and Administration Services Menu E Show List E Select E Add 4 10 4 12 3 1Show All Select this option to display the parameters of all Voice Domains in the database For each Voice Domain the following details are displayed E ID 1 10 assigned automatically when adding a new Voice Domain E Name E PF IP address 4 10 4 12 3 2Show List Select this option to view a list of all Voice Domains in the database sorted by the Voice Domain IDs For each Voice Domain ID the Voice Domain Name is displayed You can select a Voice Domain by its ID for viewing its details editing its parameters or deleting it from the database 4 10 4 12 3 3Select Use this option to select a Voice Domain by its Name for viewing its details editing its parameters or deleting it from the database 4 10 4 12 3 4Add Select this option to add a new Voice Domain Up to 10 Voice Domains may be defined The configurable parameters are 4 10 4 12 3 4 1Voice Domain Name The name of the Voice Domain The Voice Domain Name comprises a string of 1 to 32 printable characters 4 1
190. fault Action is Allow all frames matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules will be forwarded and all other frames will be discarded If the Default Action is Deny all frames matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules will be discarded and all other frames will be forwarded NOTE L3 L4 Filtering Rules are applicable only to IP packets If the Default Action is Allow non IP packets will be forwarded although they do not match any of the applicable Forwarding Rules The default option is Deny The menu also enables viewing and resetting the Non Matching Counter which displays the total number of frames that did not match any of the applicable Filtering Rules accumulated since the last reset The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status NOTE E Broadcasts and Management frames received from the network whose destination is the uBST are never filtered E ARP messages will be forwarded automatically if the following conditions are met 1 Active Rule Type is L3 L4 2 The L3 L4 Filtering Rules List includes at least one L4 Filtering Rule a defined protocol 3 The Default Action is Allow This is applicable for both interfaces Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 4 10 Filtering Examples Example 1 Block All Broadcasts Except ARP and PPPoE To block all broadcasts except ARP and PPPoE define an L2 Filtering Rule that includes all other broadc
191. fic classification and connection establishment initiation E Policy based data switching HM Service Level Agreements management BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 5 Chapter 1 System Description L2 L 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 E Centralized agent for managing the Micro Base Station unit and all registered SUs E Alarms management including external alarm inputs and activation of external devices future option An SNMP agent incorporated into the unit enables extensive In Band IB management of the Micro Base Station and all its registered SUs Out Of Band OOB management is supported through a dedicated 10 100 Base T interface A serial RS 232 port supports local configuration monitoring and debugging The Micro Base Station also contains the WiMAX ready MAC and modem It includes four channels using a common PHY and MAC that can connect to up to four outdoor radio units according to the selected diversity mode refer to Section 1 2 3 below for more details The Micro Base Station connects to the AU ODUs via Intermediate Frequency IF cables carrying full duplex data control and management signals between the Micro Base Station and the AU ODU as well as power 48 VDC and 64 MHz synchronization reference clock from the Micro Base Station to the AU ODU The IF Tx and Rx frequencies are 240 MHz and 140 MHz respectively IDU ODU service channel at 14 MHz serves for bi directional control status and management si
192. fication of transparent service downlink traffic before transmission to the destination MAC address The VLAN Classification feature supports applications where multiple VLANs are associated with a single MAC address allowing to assign different services to different VLANs VLAN Classification Mode can be set to On only if the following conditions are met E The VLAN Transparency Mode of the applicable Service Profile is set to On Operation and Administration Services Menu E A single VLAN ID is defined for the Service This means that the allowed combinations are Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List includes a single VLAN ID Hybrid VLAN Mode is On and the VLAN List is empty HM All Services assigned to the same SU must be configured with the same VLAN Classification Mode Either On or Off 4 10 4 3 1 8 Access VLAN The Access VLAN parameter enables defining a VLAN ID to be used with untagged packets received on the Ethernet port of the SU This parameter is applicable only for a transparent service VLAN Transparency Mode is On with Hybrid Mode set to On or a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to Off and an empty VLAN list A tag with the defined Access VLAN will be added by the Micro Base Station to untagged packets in the uplink The tag will be removed by the Micro Base Station from packets in the downlink For a multicast connection the Micro Base Station will send in addition to the VLAN list t
193. figuring the selected SU The SU menu includes the following options Show Unit Control Configuration Performance Monitoring Show MAC Addresses Behind SU Delete 4 9 6 1 Show Select this option to view the current value selected option of applicable parameters In addition some general status information is displayed as follows E Equipment and Registration Parameters S Oo 8 Oo Oo Oo 99 99 MAC Address MAC Address Control Number a number computed from the MAC Address that can be used for verification purposes User Name SU Name SU Type Organization Name Address Country SU Status Permanent or Temporary SUID SU IDU Type Number of Gateways Service Fault Status BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 135 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Configured SW Details Configured SW File Name Configured SW Version Configured Action E Uplink Downlink Parameters Uplink RSSI dBm Uplink SNR dB Uplink Current Rate Downlink RSSI dBm Downlink SNR dB Downlink Current Rate o 99999 E General HW Parameters Serial Number RF Card HW Revision Boot Version Cumulative Power On Time hours The cumulative power on time of the SU since first power up Main Card HW Revision Main Card HW Configuration E SW Versions information Main SW File Name Main SW Version Shadow SW File Name Shadow
194. ge each uBST is configured with a set of pre configured Profiles Certain parameters of these Profiles may be modified to reflect specific implementation requirements When the software version is upgraded these pre configured Profiles will not be installed again in the uBST This is to prevent configuration problems from occurring if the modified Profiles differ from the factory loaded Profiles Note that upon resetting to BST to its default configuration Set Factory Defaults pre configured Profiles that were modified are not affected The pre configured Service Profiles are E Internet Access L2 for basic Internet Access service with Best Effort QoS utilizing L2 Service Type This is the recommended Default Service Profile for Quick Mode E Internet Access PPPoE for basic Internet Access service with Best Effort QoS utilizing PPPoE Service Type BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 197 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Gold Silver and Bronze Teleworking for teleworking applications with different QoS requirements The pre configured Teleworking Services are asymmetric DL Rate gt UL Rate Gold Silver and Bronze LAN to LAN for LAN to LAN applications with different QoS requirements The pre configured LAN to LAN Services are symmetric DL rate UL rate VoIP Service Profiles for DRAP based gateways Two pre configured VoIP service Profiles are defined VoIP 1V for gateways with a single POTS in
195. ges 1 POTS Advanced VolP DSCP 0 BE 64 0 BE 64 Gi 26 RT 6 26 RT 6 63 CG 38 63 CG 38 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 DSCP 63 CG 108 63 CG 108 1 POTS Advanced VoIP DSCP 0 BE 64 0 BE 64 GEN 26 RT 11 26 RT 11 63 CG 88 63 CG 88 Table 4 17 Pre Configured BE and RT QoS Profile for Generic VolP Services Name Type CIR Kbps MIR Kbps CT BE 64 Best Effort NA 64 Short BE 128 Best Effort NA 128 Short RT 6 Real Time 6 NA Short RT 11 Real Time 11 NA Short Although Medium CT may be indicated for these BE QoS Profiles legacy from previous versions the actual CT is Short Table 4 18 Pre Configured CG QoS Profile for Generic VolP Services Name Type Packet Size Bytes Sample Interval msec CG 38 Continuous Grant 94 20 CG 47 Continuous Grant 117 20 CG 88 Continuous Grant 218 20 CG 108 Continuous Grant 270 20 The following tables provide details on the pre configured Profiles used for Transparent Services VLAN Transparency Mode is ON 202 Operation and Administration Services Menu Table 4 19 Pre Configured Forwarding Rule for Transparent Services Name Service Unicast Broadcast Unknown Multicast QoS Type Relaying Relaying forwarding Policy Transparent L2 Enable Enable Forward Transparent NOTE 2 The name of the Transparent Forwarding Rule cannot be edited Table 4 20 Pre Configured QoS Profile for Transparent Services Name Type CIR Kbps MIR Kbps CT Transp
196. gnaling AU ODU The AU ODU is a full duplex multi carrier radio unit that connects to an external antenna It is designed to provide high system gain and interference robustness utilizing high transmit power and low noise figure Micro Base Station Radio Configurations The 4 Channel Micro Base Station support the following radio configurations Single Channel No Diversity This is the basic configuration where the Micro Base Station connects to one ODU serving a single sector with a directional antenna Multiple Channels No Diversity Up to 4 channels can be used to cover several sectors where each channel connects to one ODU with one ODU per sector A single Micro Base Station can cover a 360 cell Where the coverage of the cell can be built from 3 sectors of 120 each with frequency reuse 1 or 4 sectors of 90 each with frequency reuse 1 i e frequency per sector or 1 2 i e 2 frequencies for 4 sectors where each frequency System Description The Micro Base Station 1 2 3 3 is used for 2 opposite sectors All ODUs served by the same Micro Base Station share a common MAC and modem Each ODU is managed separately The following figure describes the multi channel use to cover a cell of 360 with 4 sectors using frequency reuse 1 Figure 1 3 4 sectors configuration frequency reuse 1 The following figure describes the multi channel use to cover a cell of 360 with 4 sectors using frequency reuse
197. h BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 113 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 6 4 5 Sector Beam Width The beam width in degrees of the antenna s used in the geographical sector This is an optional descriptive parameter The values range is from 0 to 359 degrees The default value is 90 degrees 114 Operation and Administration ODU Menu 4 7 4 7 1 ODU Menu The ODU s must be defined prior to defining the relevant Access Parameters including the Channel s The ODU menu includes the following options E Show Summary E Select E Add Show Summary Select this option to view the current status of all defined ODUs For each defined ODU the display includes the following information E ID ODU ID 1 4 E Associated Radio Cluster The ID 1 4 defined for the associated Radio Cluster E Configured Tx Power The defined Tx Power in dBm units E ODU Configured Band The radio band configured for the ODU E Associated Channel E Admin Status Enabled or Disabled For details on the parameters refer to Section 4 7 4 Upon first power up of the uBST one ODU is defined automatically with ODU ID 1 The parameters of this automatically created ODU are E Associated Radio Cluster NA E Tx Power 28 dBm E ODU Configured Band Not Defined BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 115 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 7 2 4 7 2 1 116 Admin Status
198. he Micro Base Station using TFTP A license file can be loaded only to the Micro Base Station specified in the applicable order The Licenses menu enables viewing the current status of CPEs and Base Station Licenses The available options are E Show CPEs License Bank Status E Show Base Station Licenses E Show Temporary Grace Licenses E Show Grace Licenses E Show License Log E Show License Inventory Table Show CPEs License Bank Status Select this option to view the current status of the CPEs Licenses Bank if available The displayed information includes E License ID The relevant license type In the current version only a BW Band Width license type is available E License Value The specific details of the relevant licenses In the current version all BW licenses are Unlimited E License Count The number of currently available licenses balance Each time a license is granted to a specific CPE the License Count is decremented by one Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 6 2 4 5 6 3 Show Base Station Licenses Select this option to view the current Base Station Licenses if applicable The displayed information includes the License ID and License Value for each applicable license The applicable licenses that may be available are E Unlimited Bandwidth for all CPEs License ID BW License Value Unlimited E Number of CPEs License ID CPE License Value 50 150 250
199. he clock should be advanced during the daylight saving period The range is from 0 to 4 45 hours in steps of 15 minutes the default is 1 00 4 5 3 1 6 2 10Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout For initial synchronization a minimum of four satellites must be received properly meeting certain criteria Upon losing the 1PPS clock from the GPS or if the received clock is not considered accurate enough because the number of received satellites dropped below the minimum two satellites the local 1PPS clock will be generated using the available 16 MHz clock After a certain time defined by the Hold Over Passed Timeout parameters described below it is assumed that due to clock drifts there might be interferences among sectors belonging to the Micro Base Station and sectors belonging to neighboring Base Stations If the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout parameter is set to Enable the Micro Base Station will stop transmitting after this timeout unless the number of properly received satellites has increased again to four or more to prevent interferences to the sectors belonging to other Base Stations If it is set to Disable transmissions will continue indefinitely at the expense of potential interferences to sectors belonging to other Base Stations 84 Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu The default is Disable Hold Over indefinitely 4 5 3 1 6 2 11Hold Over Passed Timeout Min 4 5 3 1 6 3 This parameter defin
200. he single Access VLAN The SU will be responsible to remove the Access VLAN if it is received on a multicast connection A maximum of one Access VLAN can be defined per SU The range is from 1 to 4094 or null for no Access VLAN 4 10 4 3 1 9 Admin Status The administrative status of the Service can be either Enabled or Disabled Select Disabled to disable the Service 4 10 4 3 1 10Operation Status 4 10 4 3 2 A read only display of the operational status that is available in the Show menus only Up means that the Service is currently in use Performance The Performance sub menu enables viewing and resetting the connections counters of the Service For each connection in each direction the following information is displayed E Connection ID and direction E Connection Type BE NRT RT or CG HM QoS Profile Parameters The values of the relevant QoS Profile s parameters BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 171 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 172 E Bytes Submitted The number of bytes submitted by upper layers to this connection Bytes Transmitted The number of bytes transmitted to the wireless port through this connection including retransmissions Bytes Retransmitted The number of bytes retransmitted to the wireless port through this connection Bytes Dropped The number of bytes dropped from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link identical to Bytes Discarded Byte
201. ials C Null blank User Password non null User Name Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 1 5 RADIUS Authorization and Accounting servers may be implemented in the same server are required for proper service provisioning A Base Station will reject an SU if its name User Name is identical to that of another SU that is already served by the Base Station However several SUs connected to different Base Stations may be authenticated and provisioned with services even if they use the same User Name and User Password The maximum number of duplicate SUs using the same User Name and User Password that may be authenticated by the Authentication server Duplicate Sessions is configured in the RADIUS Accounting server The service provisioning information sent by the RADIUS Authentication server to the Base Station includes for each service up to a maximum of 5 services per SU the name of the Service Profile and VLAN parameters In addition the authentication message includes also the Session Timeout and Termination Action If the Termination Action is Default the Session services to the SU will be terminated If the Termination Action is RADIUS request the Base Station will try to re authenticate the user If the service configuration in the Authentication server has been changed the services provisioned to the SU if re authenticated will be updated accordingly Using VLANs and VPLs VLANs can be used for c
202. ice Type The Maximum Number of Voice Calls parameter sets the upper limit on the number of simultaneous VoIP calls that can be supported by the Service using the Service Profile This parameter is applicable for L2 and Voice Service Profiles for calls made by devices that support DRAP and for Managed VoIP Service Profiles for calls to from SIP gateways that are managed by suitable Policy Function and Application Function entities The available range is from 0 to 50 calls Operation and Administration Services Menu x 4 10 4 4 10 4 10 4 4 11 4 10 4 5 4 10 4 5 1 4 10 4 5 2 NOTE To properly support Call Waiting the Maximum Number of Voice Calls should be configured to a value that is twice the number of actual voice sessions that can be supported simultaneously Voice Domain Managed VolP Service Type The Voice Domain parameter specifies the Voice Domain associated with the Managed VoIP Service Profile It must be one of the Voice Domains available in the database of the Micro Base Station Service Profile Class A read only parameter available only in Show menu Currently the Class of all Service Profiles is Local Forwarding Rules The Forwarding Rule includes the features that affect the wireless broadcast domain Any number of L2 and or Voice Services may belong to the same broadcast domain if they share the same Forwarding Rule Data in a PPPoE Service can pass only between the subscriber s equipment
203. ices may be defined per subscriber one or more subscribers can be supported per SU Max number of Service Profiles per uBST 1 024 Max number of Forwarding Rules per uBST 255 Max number of Priority Classifiers per uBST 255 Max number of QoS Profiles per uBST 255 Max number of Subscribers per BST 1 024 applicable only for permanent SUs Min number of data connections per Service 2 1 uplink 1 downlink Max number of data connections per Service 8 4 uplink 4 downlink Max number of data connections per SU 32 Max number of data connections per uBST 3072 3 x number of SUs 3 connections are reserved for each SU Max number of SUs per uBST 250 Max number of MAG addresses in Bridging uBST 1 000 Table SU 512 Aging time is configurable The default is 3 minutes for SU 10 minutes for uBST with DRAP and or Managed VolP Service Max number of VLANs per Service 16 Max number of VLANs per SU 16 Max number of VLANs VPL IDs per uBST 1 024 Max number of concurrent voice calls per 50 Voice L2 Service with DRAP and or Managed VolP Service Max number of concurrent voice calls per uBST 50 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 21 Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 10 Physical and Electrical 1 5 10 1 Mechanical Table 1 10 Mechanical Specifications Micro Base Station Equipment
204. iltering the displayed traps and enabling disabling traps The available options are E Show Active Alarms E Traps Display Filter E Show Traps Log E Trap Configuration Show Active Alarms Select to view the currently active alarms For more details on active alarms refer to the Traps and Alarms document Traps Display Filter Select to view update the filtering criteria for the Traps Log display The configurable filtering criteria are Minimum Severity The Minimum Severity parameter enables defining the minimum severity filter Traps whose severity is below the defined severity will not be displayed The options are Critical Major Minor Warning and Info The default is Info severity which means that all the traps in the log will be displayed Days The Days parameter enables defining the period for which traps will be displayed The available options are from 1 to 31 days Only traps that occurred within the last N days where N is the value selected for this parameter will be displayed The default is 31 days Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 4 3 4 5 4 4 4 5 4 4 1 Show Traps Log Select to view the traps log The traps will be displayed based on the filtering criteria defined by the Minimum Severity and Days parameters in the Traps Display Filtering option up to a maximum of the last 1000 traps For more details refer to the Traps and Alarms document Trap Configuration
205. imum increment of time which is defined by the CT parameter The range is from O to 12 000 Kbps Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 4 7 5 4 10 4 7 6 4 10 4 7 7 4 10 4 7 8 4 10 4 8 4 10 4 8 1 4 10 4 8 1 1 MIR NRT and BE QoS Types MIR is the maximum information rate that the system will allow for the connection The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of time which is defined by the CT parameter The range is from 1 to 12 000 Kbps MIR cannot be lower than CIR applicable to NRT QoS type Packet Size CG QoS Type The Packet Size parameter defines the amount of data in bytes that is expected for each grant The range is from 64 to 1550 bytes Sample Interval CG QoS Type The Sample Interval parameter defines the time in milliseconds between two successive grants inter arrival time The range is from 5 to 100 milliseconds QoS Profile Class A read only parameter available only in Show menu Currently the Class of all QoS Profiles is Local Filtering Rules The Filtering Rules menu enables defining L2 Filtering Rules and L3 L4 Filtering Rules L2 Filtering Rules An L2 Layer 2 Filtering Rule includes the MAC Address and Ethertype Each entry can be defined for either the Source or Destination MAC Address field It is possible to define Any for either the MAC Address or Ethertype field but not for both fields The L2 Filtering Rules menu enables defining
206. ion The multirate algorithm optimizes the trade off between capacity and error rate In most deployments most of the links use high order modulation most of the time maximizing capacity Bad links use lower order modulation maximizing availability The algorithm provides independent adaptation per SU and it is performed independently for UL and DL based on link quality information Burst Error Rate SNR The algorithm provides dynamic adaptation modulation can be changed on a per burst basis UL transmission rate is determined by the AU and DL transmission rate is determined by the SU The multirate algorithm in the uplink adapts dynamically both the modulation and the number of sub channels to be allocated to each SU When the Multirate algorithm is disabled communication with connected SUs will continue using the last uplink and downlink rates selected by the Multirate algorithm The Set Rates option in the SU see Section 4 9 6 3 4 2 which becomes available only when the Multirate algorithm is disabled in the AU enables setting the Uplink Current Rate and the Downlink Current Rate to any of the values listed in Table 4 4 The multirate algorithm chooses dynamically between several rates These are also the rates that can be configured for the Basic Rate parameters Table 4 4 Rates Modulation Schemes and Coding No Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 BPSK 3 4 not applicable for TDD systems QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4
207. ion at a time including the managed device s associated SUs AlvariCRAFT allows accessing a wide array of monitoring and configuration options including E Device Manager for the selected Micro Base Station including it s associated SUs E Selected unit configuration modification HM Local Service Profiles verification and modification HM Local Service Provisioning E Firmware upgrade for the NPU AUs and SUs System Description E On line performance data monitoring E Export of configuration details to a CSV file E Support for Telnet cut through to the Base Station and http cut through to Gateways behind connected SUs 1 4 3 BreezeMAX Service Manager BreezeMAX Service Manager provides centralized management of user authentication and authorization using the industry standard RADIUS protocol The BreezeMAX Service Manager receives from the NPU operating as a NAS the authentication details User Name and Password upon network entry of a new CPE and respond if authentication if verified by matching details in the database by sending properties of the Services that should be granted to the user BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 13 Chapter 1 System Description 13 Specifications 1 5 1 Radio Table 1 1 Radio Specifications Item Description Frequency Range Unit Band Frequency MHz AU ODU HP 2 3 2300 2360 AU ODU HP 2 3 WCS 2305 2317 2348 2360 i
208. ious status E After the 3 days temporary grace period the CPE is moved to the Grace Licenses list After expiry of the full 30 days grace period the CPE is moved to a list of Grace Period Expired CPEs even if during the grace period the services assigned to them were changed so that the aggregate MIR is no longer above 2 Mbps A CPE that was moved to the Grace Period Expired list will remain in this list for 3 months A CPE that is included in this list cannot be granted another grace period Any attempt to assign to it a service that will bring the aggregate MIR to a value above 2 Mbps will be rejected BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 101 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 6 4 4 5 7 102 The Show Temporary Grace Licenses displays a table that includes the MAC addresses of CPEs that are currently included in the Temporary Grace License list For each CPE the displayed list includes also the License ID only BW license is applicable in the current version and the expiration date of the temporary grace period The Show Grace Licenses displays a table that includes the MAC addresses of CPEs that are currently included in the Grace License list For each CPE the displayed list includes also the License ID only BW license is applicable in the current version and the expiry date of the grace period n addition the Status of each entry is displayed The possible Status options are E Grace Activated
209. ireless link It also enables viewing and updating Channel s parameters For details refer to Section 4 8 Operation and Administration The Micro Base Station s Main Menu 4 4 5 4 4 6 4 4 7 SU Menu The SU menu enables viewing summary information of all relevant SUs configuring the parameters of a selected SU and defining new SUs It also enables managing a selected SU s SW versions and viewing its current status configuration and performance information For more details refer to Section 4 9 Services Menu The Service menu enables viewing updating and adding service profiles and subscribers and allocating services to subscribers It also enables viewing and updating filtering rules and the MAC Address Deny List For more details refer to Section 4 10 Exit Select the Exit option X to exit the Monitor program and terminate the Telnet session BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 67 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 4 5 1 68 Micro Base Station Menu The Micro Base Station menu includes the following options EH Show E Unit Control E Configuration E Alarms and Traps E Performance Monitoring E Licenses E RADIUS Show Select this option to view general unit s details as well as the current value selected option of configurable parameters HM Unit Details IDU IDU IDU IDU IDU IDU IDU IF Card HW Revision Q D
210. isable Disable Forward NRT 1500 1750 Silver Teleworking L2 Disable Disable Forward NRT 1000 1150 Bronze Teleworking L2 Disable Disable Forward NRT 750 850 Gold LAN to LAN L2 Enable Enable Forward NRT 1500 1750 Silver LAN to LAN L2 Enable Enable Forward NRT 1000 1150 Bronze LAN to LAN L2 Enable Enable Forward NRT 750 850 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 199 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 11 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Data Services Name Type Uplink Uplink QoS Downlink Downlink Priority Profiles Priority QoS Profiles ranges ranges BE Asymmetric 802 1p 7 BE 96 7 BE 750 Gold Asymmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 128 192 7 NRT 1500 1750 Silver Asymmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 96 128 7 NRT 1000 1150 Bronze Asymmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 96 128 7 NRT 750 850 Gold Symmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 7 NRT 1500 1750 1500 1750 Silver Symmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 7 NRT 1000 1150 1000 1150 Bronze Symmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 750 850 7 NRT 750 850 Table 4 12 Pre Configured QoS Profiles for Data Services Name Type CIR Kbps MIR Kbps CT BE 96 Best Effort NA 96 Short BE 750 Best Effort NA 750 Short NRT 96 128 Non Real Time 96 128 Medium NRT 128 192 Non Real Time 128 192 Medium NRT 750 850 Non Real Time 750 850 Medium NRT 1000 1150 Non Real Time 1000 1150 Medium NRT 1500 1750 Non Real Time 1500 1750 Medium Although Medium CT may be indi
211. king Value The Priority Marking Value enables definition of the marking value for data frames transmitted to the backbone according to the configured Priority Marking Mode Table 4 8 Priority Marking Values Transparent Priority Marking Mode Priority Marking Values Range Not Applicable 802 1p 0 7 DSCP 0 63 4 10 4 4 7 4 10 4 4 8 4 10 4 4 9 178 Forwarding Rule The Forwarding Rule to be used by the Service Profile The Forwarding Rule parameter is not applicable to transparent Service Profiles VLAN Transparency Mode On as all transparent Service Profiles share the same pre defined Forwarding Rule The Forwarding Rule must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the Forwarding Rule menu The Service Type defined in the selected Forwarding Rule must match the one defined for the Service Profile However L2 Forwarding Rule can be used in a Voice Service Profile and vice versa Priority Classifier L2 PPPoE and Managed VolP Service Type The Priority Classifier to be used by the Service Profile Not applicable for Voice Services DRAP based that use provide connections according to the gateway s properties call status and required RTP bandwidth The Priority Classifier must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the Priority Classifier menu Maximum Number of Voice Calls L2 Voice and Managed VoIP Serv
212. l not expand to occupy the full bandwidth E Best Effort BE service is for services where neither throughput nor delay guarantees are provided The Subscriber Unit sends requests for bandwidth in either random access slots or dedicated transmission opportunities The occurrence of dedicated opportunities is subject to network load and the Subscriber Unit cannot rely on their presence Service parameters include Maximum Information Rate MIR Committed Time CT is set to a fixed value Short and cannot be configured E Continuous Grant CG service is tailored for carrying constant bit rate CBR real time services characterized by fixed size data packets on a periodic basis such as VoIP or E1 T1 The Base Station schedules regularly in a preemptive manner grants of the size defined at connection setup without an explicit request from the Subscriber Unit This eliminates the overhead and latency of bandwidth requests in order to meet the delay and jitter requirements of the underlying service Service parameters include Packet Size unsolicited grant size and Sampling Rate grant interval The priorities of allocating bandwidth to connections are in accordance with the QoS Type of the connections in the following order 1 CG 2 RT BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 183 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 7 1 4 10 4 7 2 4 10 4 7 3 4 10 4 7 4 184 3 NRT 4 BE For each of the RT NRT and BE
213. l outdoor GPS Receiver is a pole mountable GPS receiver and antenna in a single environmentally protected enclosure The Outdoor GPS Receiver is powered by a 12 VDC power source supplied to it by the NPU via the GPS Adapter The RS 422 interface allows installation at distances up to 100m GPS Adapter Unit The GPS Adapter connects the different GPS units to the NPU adapting the different interfaces Future versions may include an internal GPS module that will allow an all in one low cost solution A future optional addition of OCXO in the GPS Adapter box may provide an improved hold over solution when the GPS is not synchronized The GPS Adapter is powered by 12 VDC supplied by the NPU The GPS Adapter is installed in a 1U high panel the same panel that is used for the ODU Power Feeders BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 9 Chapter 1 System Description 1 3 1 3 1 Networking Equipment The Micro Base Station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard data communication and telecommunication equipment The Micro Base Station connects to the backbone through a 10 100 Base T port The point to point link from the Micro Base Station to the backbone can be either wired or wireless Alvarion offers the DUET 6004 a V5 2 to SIP Access Gateway connecting a Class 5 switch over V5 2 to its Voice Gateways DUET 6004 Access Gateway The DUET 6004 is a carrier grade V5 2 to SIP gateway connecting a Class 5
214. le including one way and two way transmission and a diversity of distribution capacities A Message Digest algorithm developed by RSA Laboratories used for creating unforgeable digital signatures MD5 produces an 128 bit 16 byte message digest Most existing software applications that handle certificates only support MDS Management Information Base A database of objects that can be monitored by a network management system SNMP uses standardized MIB formats that allow any SNMP tools to monitor any device defined by a MIB BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 245 Glossary MIR MMDS MRRC NA NAS NAT NIC NIU NLOS 246 Maximum Information Rate Specifies the maximum rate of information that can be available to a user The MIR is used by the traffic policing mechanism to prevent users from sending excess traffic to the network Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service MMDS is a licensed wireless service that has the capability to provide broadband access MMDS operates in several parts of the 2 GHz spectrum Maximum Receive Ratio Combining Not Available or Not Applicable Network Access Server A Network Access Server operates as a client of RADIUS The client is responsible for passing user information to designated RADIUS server s and then acting on the response Network Address Translation Basic Network Address Translation Basic NAT is a method by which IP addresses are mapped from one
215. le to the location selected for the indoor equipment BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 35 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 2 Sidd 22 11 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment Installation Requirements Packing List HM Micro Base Station Unit E DC power cable M Monitor cable Additional Installation Requirements M Ethernet cable straight for connecting the unit to a hub switch E A grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the unit s ground terminal to the rack or to a ground connection E For installation in a 21 ETSI rack two 21 ETSI rack adapters HM A portable PC for configuring parameters using the Monitor cable E Other installation tools and materials The Micro Base Station Front Panel 51617 8 10 12 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 Figure 2 5 Micro Base Station Front Panel i 36 Installation Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment Table 2 5 Micro Base Station Connectors Name Connector Functionality DATA 5 10 100Base T RJ 45 with 2 Connection to the backbone Cable connection embedded LEDS to a hub switch router Straight MGMT 6 10 100Base T RJ 45 with 2 Connection to OOB management embedded EDS Cable connection to a PC Crossed Cable connection to a hub switch router Straight MON 7 3 pin low profile jack Access for debugging and configuration using the Monitor program ALRM I
216. licy Function PF entity that communicates with the Micro Base Station using R3 signaling protocol to provide admission control for the voice sessions The Micro Base Station recognizes at uplink direction the first SIP packet transfer from any voice connection using a specified port port 5060 and using R3 location allocation command indicates to the PF its own IP address and the specific SIP client s IP address This will be used by AF to hook the SIP signaling messages and requesting the Micro Base Station to add remove or increase resources for specific call at uplink outgoing call or downlink incoming call Only those calls allocated with resources by the Micro Base Station will be allowed to be established and served Those rejected due to insufficient resources will not be allocated and will be rejected by SIP signaling managed by the AF The criteria for rejecting are the allowed number of simultaneous calls per each Micro Base Station this parameter serves for both Managed VolP sessions and DRAP based sessions the allowed number of voice calls for the specific Service The Managed VoIP Service allows also data connections that function like a regular L2 Service including the ability to transport PPPoE traffic The data connection is used also for initial detection of SIP traffic in the uplink Upon actual provisioning of a Managed VolP service the system automatically handles Signaling and RTP connections establishment including QoS
217. ll or most of the SUs operate in Non Line Of Sight NLOS conditions typical to CPE Si units Fourth Order Diversity for LOS and NLOS mode will provide better overall performance in deployments where there are SUs operating in both Line Of Sight LOS conditions expected for most CPE PRO S units and Non Line Of Sight NLOS conditions The default is No Diversity NOTE A change in the Diversity Mode parameter takes effect immediately It automatically resets the uBST It also disables the Admin Status of all its channels when changing from No Diversity to Second Order Fourthe Order Diversity and vice versa When changing from Fourth Order Diversity to Second Order Diversity it disables the Admin Status of Channels 3 and 4 Select Use this option to select a Channel ID 1 4 to open the Channel f menu for viewing or updating the Channel s parameters The configurable Channel parameters are E Associated ODU An ODU ID 1 4 of an already defined ODU E Downlink Tx Frequency MHz The Tx frequency in MHz which must be in accordance with the selected Bandwidth see Section 4 8 2 1 and the rules defined in the Frequency Bands File for the frequency band selected as the Configured ODU Frequency Band of the associated ODU see Section 4 7 4 3 The help text displayed upon clicking the Tab key reflects the limitations imposed by these rules In addition the following rules must be followed in No Diversity mode if more than one ch
218. lues and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation taking into account the considerations described in Section 4 10 1 5 Table 4 15 Pre Configured Forwarding Rule for Voice Services Name Unknown Multicast forwarding Policy QoS Broadcast Relaying Unicast Relaying Service Type VolP Voice Enable hard coded Enable hard coded Forward hard BE 128 coded All pre configured Service profiles for Voice DRAP based VoIP Services and Generic 3rd party VolP Services share the same pre configured Forwarding Rule to enable direct communication between all users of VoIP Services regardless of the gateway type and other possible differences in the Service Profiles Table 4 16 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic VolP Service Name 1 POTS Basic VolP G 729 Downlink QoS Profiles Downlink Priority Ranges Uplink Uplink Priority QoS Ranges Profiles Type DSCP 63 CG 47 63 CG 47 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 201 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 16 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic VolP Service Name Type Uplink Uplink Downlink Downlink Priority QoS Priority QoS Profiles Ranges Profiles Ran
219. ly to Channels associated with a defined ODU Computed using the rules defined in the Frequency Bands Configuration File In TDD systems the Uplink Frequency is the same as the Downlink Frequency E Admin Status Enabled Disabled E Configured Tx Power Applicable only to Channels associated with a defined ODU The Tx Power in dBm configured in the ODU E Associated Radio Cluster Applicable only to Channels associated with a defined ODU The Associated Radio Cluster defined in the ODU Upon first power up of the uBST the channels are defined automatically as follows E Associated ODU Channel 1 is automatically associated with ODU 1 For all other Channels 2 4 the Associated ODU is NA E Downlink Tx Frequency MHz 3551 750 E Admin Status Enabled for Channel 1 Disabled for all other Channels 2 4 Diversity Mode The Diversity Mode of the AU For details on diversity modes refer to Micro Base Station Radio Configurations on page 6 The available options are 1 No Diversity 2 Second Order Diversity 3 Fourth Order Diversity for NLOS 4 Fourth Order Diversity for LOS and NLOS Each of the Fourth Order Diversity modes uses a different downlink diversity scheme optimally adapted to the different propagation conditions prevailing in the relevant deployment scenario Fourth Order Diversity for NLOS should typically Operation and Administration Access Parameters Menu E 4 8 3 3 be used when a
220. m Architecture 4 System Description The Micro Base Station 1 2 1 2 1 The Micro Base Station The Multi Carrier High Power Full Duplex Micro Base Station uBST provides all the functionality necessary to communicate with SUs and to connect to the backbone of the Service Provider The Micro Base Station Unit is designed to provide an alternative to the BreezeMAX Modular Base Station and a low cost solution in places were the number of subscribers is limited and only one or two sectors are necessary i e communities areas The use of the same AU ODU that is used by the modular Base Station provides an easy migration path and protection of the initial investment when the customer base increases and there is a need to replace the Micro Base Station with the full modular Base Station equipment The Micro Base Station equipment comprises an indoor Micro Base Station Unit and an outdoor radio unit AU ODU Micro Base Station Indoor Unit The Micro Base Station unit provides the full base station functionality necessary for serving a single sector The Micro Base Station is powered from a 48 VDC power source The functionality of the Micro Base station is very similar to the combined functionalities of NPU and AU IDU modules of the modular Base Station Figure 1 2 Micro Base Station Unit The functionality of the Micro Base Station unit includes E Backbone Ethernet connectivity via a 10 100 Base T network interface E Traf
221. meters Summary ssecesieccesecssssetesancacseescinaanssesezace sansecnasennestenceiseansnecuesaaecevevanensaaee 204 Appendix A Software Upgrade AT Before VOU Statt saa samde ainaani anaia uaa i ana 222 A 2 File Loading Procedure sssasenssunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 223 A 3 Completing the Software Upgrade Switching Versions mnvrrrrrnnnnnnnnnnvvvnvernnnnn 225 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B INMFOGUCTION Lacsemesemmuvainmiemugi ammen ad 228 B 1 1 Fever 228 B 1 2 General ASSUMPONS sssri iios ee aaa a N edocs EREE ARE 228 B 2 1 POTS Basic VolP G 729 Service Profile rrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnner 230 B 2 1 Service Characteristics uansmsernsmmnengesmm k en emmvnnudreentdatae 230 B 2 2 RTP BW Calculation ar ANE 230 B 2 3 RTOP BW Calculation saa eea aed anaa EAEE a 230 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual XV Contents B 2 4 QoS Profile spa niece cedeunn caevsuensdatactateiteemuerenentace 230 B 3 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 Service Profile rrrrrrrnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnen 232 B 3 1 Service Characteristics sii scacccsssncedavcdcesvenass cxnpedinstteeseiscenaneds vecvaesisdenvedsse tenants 232 B 3 2 Voice RTP BW Calculation sd 232 B 3 3 Voice RTCP BW Calculation s rrnrrrnnnonvrrnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnrrnnnerrrrrnnenennrnnnernnnnnnerenn 232 B 3 4 T 38 14 400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculatio
222. ministration 4 5 2 1 The Unit Control menu includes the following options E Change Password E Reset E Set Factory Defaults E SW Versions Control E Create Backup HM Monitor Inactivity Timeout Change Password For security and control reasons the Change Password option is available only for users with Administration access rights The Change Password option enables defining the passwords for each of the three different access levels Administrator Installer and Monitor After changing the password for a selected access level you will be prompted to re enter the new password for confirmation NOTE For security reasons the passwords do not change after performing the Set Factory Defaults operation For the same reason the passwords cannot be managed using SNMP and are are not included in backup configuration files Valid passwords Up to 16 printable characters case sensitive The default passwords are Table 4 2 Default Passwords Access Level Default Password Administrator admin Installer installer Monitor monitor 4 5 2 2 Reset Unit Select this option to reset the uBST To avoid unintentional reset you will be prompted to confirm the reset request Changes to some of the configurable parameters are applied only after reset Refer to Section 4 10 for information on 72 Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 2 3 4 5 2 4 which parameters are ch
223. mmunity The following are the guidelines for configuring the basic parameters E All parameters of both ports should be configured Otherwise default values shall be used E Ifremote OOB management via a router connected to the Management port is used the parameters should be configured to ensure different subnets for the Data port the Management port local OOB management and the Management Port Destination The Management Port Destination Subnet is the subnet behind a router connected to the Management port NOTE x It is highly recommended to use the Management port for local management only Typically the port should be down disconnected CAUTION A Do not configure the IP Address of the Management port to 0 0 0 0 as this will cause loss of management connectivity via the Data port E Authorized Manager s must be configured properly to enable remote management using AlvariSTAR or another SNMP based application BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 51 Chapter 3 Commissioning Ed x SLA 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 3 52 NOTE If no Authorized Manager is defined in the device it can be managed using SNMP by any station If at least one Authorized Manager is defined the device can be managed only by a station whose parameters match a defined Authorized Manager Once the basic parameters have been configured additional parameters and services can be remotely configured using
224. n eerrrnrrrnnnorvrrrnnnonnnrnnnrnnnrnnnrernnr 232 B 3 5 FAX RTCP BW Calculation sacccssscrtscscaactncsnensecsaressadianssenntannuncassaatsaas eadnuemente 233 BG 068 PIOties tics sisxecetdacrccneedeuie tines bephiiseratearannieddees ies anaee ad eee 233 B 4 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 Service Profile rrrnnnnnvrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnen 234 BAT Semee Characteristics lt cisciierseia siesta Sutayeadenctsrends EREE Ra a a ERAEN EENS 234 B 4 2 RTP BW Calculation sansssesaskedustiadesikqgsanbnasei kjesevtue 234 B43 RTCP BW CG lbuldfonuasssaarumsemmesesanntnnuiiaaauttjnnndin 234 B44 RO Profile EE E 234 B 5 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 711 Service Profile rrrrnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnen 236 BEI Service Characteristics see 236 B 5 2 Voice RTP BW Calculation errnnnnronnnrnrrnnnnnrnnrrnnnonnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnrnrrnnseernnn 236 B 5 3 Voice RTCP BW CA ulfbkuuuuassssnsememeb nmeviug nede 236 B 5 4 T 38 14 400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation rerrrnrrrnnnororrrnnnnnnvvnnnrnnnrnnnrrennr 236 B 5 5 FAX RTCP BW Gale ilanoniccseccctenc ccs canoe kee ee elec 237 B 5 6 008 Flekket ES E SR 237 E PE RE EE OR EE EE a 239 E ERE EE 295 xvi BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 4 1 Figures BreezeMAX System Architect
225. n active call is present should be avoided BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 229 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B 2 B 2 1 B 2 2 Bud B 2 4 230 1 POTS Basic VolP G 729 Service Profile Service Characteristics E G 729 codec 20msec sample interval E 1 POTS E No Fax E Priority marking behind the SU is not used All VoIP related traffic is classified onto a single Continuous Grant CG connection E Multiple media streams to support Call Waiting If the traffic exceeds the BW allocated to the CG connection the SU may request to double the allocated BW RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth for a G 729 call 8 Kbps codec bit rate with RTP and 20 bytes of voice payload is Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 20 bytes 78 bytes Total packet size bits 78 bytes 8 bits per byte 624 bits PPS Packets Per Second 8 Kbps codec bit rate 160 bits 50 pps Note 160 bits 20 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call Total packet size 624 bits 50 pps 31 2 Kbps RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 31 2 Kbps approximately 3 1 Kbps QoS Profile The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 31 2 Kbps To accommodate for other traffic types such as RTCP up to 3 1 Kbps Voice Signaling up to 2 Kbps and Data Device Management w
226. n or fewer computers and or employees Source Subscriber Unit Transmission Control Protocol Connection oriented transport layer protocol that provides reliable full duplex data transmission TCP is the part of the TCP IP suite of protocols that is responsible for forming data connections between nodes that are reliable as opposed to IP which is connectionless and unreliable Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A set of protocols developed by the U S Department of Defense to allow communication between dissimilar networks and systems over long distances TCP IP is the de facto standard for data transmission over networks including the Internet Time Division Duplex is a duplexing technique dividing a radio channel in time to allow downlink operation during part of the frame period and uplink operation in the remainder of the frame period Time Division Multiplexing Technique in which information from multiple channels can be allocated bandwidth on a single link based on pre assigned time slots Bandwidth is allocated to each channel regardless of whether the station has data to transmit BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 251 Glossary TFTP Tx UDP UL UTC VLAN VLSI VoIP VPL 252 Trivial File Transfer Protocol Simplified version of FTP that allows files to be transferred from one computer to another over a network usually without the use of client authentication Time To Li
227. n the Uplink QoS Profiles list see below packets with a priority from 22 to 42 will be transmitted using the second QoS Profile defined in the Uplink QoS Profiles list and packets with a priority higher than 42 43 63 will be transmitted using the third Uplink QoS Profile A ranges list that includes a single entry 63 for DSCP and 7 for 802 1p means that priority based classification is not used Uplink QoS Profiles The Uplink QoS Profiles parameter enables to define up to four QoS Profiles where each entry is the QoS Profile associated with the applicable entry in the Uplink Upper Priority Limits list The list includes up to four QoS Profile Names where each name must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the QoS Profile menu Each entry in the Uplink QoS Profiles list is associated with the applicable entry in the Uplink Priority Ranges list Downlink Upper Priority Limits The DownLink Upper Priority Limits list functionality is the same as that of the Uplink Upper Priority Limits list except that the ranges are defined for downlink communication Downlink QoS Profiles The Downlink QoS Profiles list functionality is the same as that of the Uplink QoS Profiles list except that the QoS Profiles are associated with the entries in the Downlink Upper Priority Limits list Priority Classifier Class A read only parameter available only in Show menu Currently the Class of all Priority Classifiers
228. nabled or disabled The default is Enabled When the Auto Negotiation Option is enabled the Speed and Duplex parameter in the relevant Show menus displays the detected operation mode When the Auto Negotiation Option is disabled the Speed and Duplex parameter in the relevant Show menus displays the configured operation mode Upon selection of the Disable option the user is prompted to select the speed and duplex Select Link Speed and Duplex This option is applicable only when the Auto Negotiation Option is disabled The available options are 10 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex and 100 Mbps Full Duplex Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 3 3 6 Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable The Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter allows enabling disabling remote management traffic via a router connected to the DATA port This parameter does not affect management traffic via the local subnet defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask If remote management for the Data port is disabled then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager A The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters B The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask paramet
229. ncluding WCS filter AU ODU HP 2 5 A 2496 2602 AU ODU HP 2 5 B 2590 2690 AU ODU HP TDD 3 3a 3300 3355 AU ODU HP TDD 3 3b 3345 3400 AU ODU HP TDD 3 4a 3399 5 3455 AU ODU HP TDD 3 4b 3445 3500 AU ODU HP TDD 3 5a 3500 3555 AU ODU HP TDD 3 5b 3545 3600 Operation Mode TDD Channel Bandwidth E 3 5 MHz E 5 MHz Central Frequency Resolution 0 125 MHz actual configurable frequencies depend on the local radio regulations and allocated spectrum Antenna Port AU ODU N Type 50 Ohm Max Input Power at AU ODU antenna port 60 dBm before saturation 8 dBm before damage Output Power at AU ODU antenna port 2 x GHz 36 dBm 1 dB maximum Power control range 6 dB in 1 dB steps 3 3 GHz 32 dBm 1 dB maximum Power control range 10 dB in 1 dB range 3 5 GHz 34 dBm 1 dB maximum Power control range 10 dB in 1 dB range Modulation OFDM in the Downlink OFDMA 16 in the Uplink N x SUs per Symbol N 1 16 BPSK QPSK QAM16 QAM64 System Description Specifications Table 1 1 Radio Specifications Item Description FEC Convolutional Coding 1 2 2 3 3 4 Typical Sensitivity BER 1E 6 Modulation amp Minimum Sensitivity dBm Sensitivity dBm Coding SNR dB 3 5 MHz BW 5 MHz BW BPSK 1 2 2 5 98 5 97 QPSK 1 2 5 9 94 5 93 QPSK 3 4 8 6 91 5 90 QAM16 1 2 11 4 87 5 86 QAM16 3 4 14 8
230. nect the power cord to the unit s DC socket located on the rear panel Connect the other end of the power cord to the 48 VDC power source as follows Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source Connect the red wire to the Return contact Connect the ground wire to the ground Connect the IF cable s already connected at the other end to the AU ODU s to the proper channels ODU 1 to ODU 4 connectors If only a single AU ODU is used connect the IF cable to the ODU 1 connector If two AU ODUs are used with second order diversioty connect the relevant AU ODUs to ODU 1 and ODU 2 connectors To avoid transmissions at undesired frequencies verify that the frequency and bandwidth parameters are properly configured before connecting the IF cables Installation Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment 2 2 5 Daisy chaining Two or More Micro Base Station If two or more Micro Base Stations are collocated their operation should be synchronized Use a synchronization cable supplied separately to connect the GPS SYNC OUT connector of the first Master unit to the GPS SYNC IN connector of the second unit The GPS SYNC OUT of this second unit may be connected to the GPS SYNC IN of a third unit and so on up to a maximum of 5 Micro Base Stations one Master and 4 Slave units NOTE x The Chain parameters of the daisy chained Micro Base Station must be configured properly BreezeMAX Micro Base
231. nitors the QoS of an RTP connection and conveys information about the on going session Real Time Protocol An Internet protocol for transmitting real time data such as audio and video RTP itself does not guarantee real time delivery of data but it does provide mechanisms for the sending and receiving applications to support streaming data Typically RTP runs on top of the UDP protocol although the specification is general enough to support other transport protocols Receive Session Initiation Protocol An application layer control IETF protocol that can establish modify and terminate multimedia sessions such as Internet telephony calls VoIP SIP can also invite participants to already existing sessions such as multicast conferences Media can be added to and removed from an existing session SIP transparently supports name mapping and redirection services which supports personal mobility users can maintain a single externally visible identifier regardless of their network location Service Level Agreement A contract between a service provider and the end user which stipulates and commits the service provider to a required level of service An SLA relates to issues such as specified level of service support options enforcement or penalty provisions for services not provided a guaranteed level of system performance as relates to downtime or uptime a specified level of customer support and what software or hardware will be p
232. nless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein Any changes or modifications of equipment including opening of the equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for It could also void the user s authority to operate the equipment Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual is manufactured and warranted by third parties All such equipment must be installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or the manufacturers Non compliance with such instructions may result in serious damage and or bodily harm and or void the user s authority to operate the equipment and or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual ix About This Manual This manual describes the BreezeMAX BreezeMAX Micro Base Station with SW version 4 2 and details how to install operate and manage the system components This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing setting and operating the BreezeMAX Micro Base Station system and for system administrators responsible for managing the system This manual co
233. nlimited bandwidth licenses and allocate licenses to selected L model CPEs on a need basis refer to Section 4 9 6 3 9 for details on assigning a license to a selected CPE Rather than granting licenses only to specific L model CPEs the Network Service Provider may also purchase a Base Station unlimited bandwidth license to override the bandwidth limitations of all L model CPEs served by the Base Station Note however that such a license is local once the CPE moves to another Base Station it does not retain to capability for unlimited bandwidth On the other hand once a CPE has been allocated with a specific license this license is permanent and the CPE is no longer identified as an L model CPE In addition the basic Micro Base Station is supplied with the capability to support a maximum of 20 CPEs The Network Service Provider may purchase licenses that will enable supporting a higher number of CPEs 50 150 or 250 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 99 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Ed 4 5 6 1 100 NOTE The Number of CPEs licenses of the Micro Base Station are accumulative To support 250 CPEs it is needed to install first a license for 50 CPEs followed by a license for 150 CPEs and thena license for 250 CPEs The various licenses CPEs Unlimited Bandwidth Licenses Bank Base Station Unlimited Bandwidth License for all CPEs and Number of Supported CPEs License are supplied as files to be loaded to t
234. nnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnne 123 4 8 4 Multirate Parameters Luuimumummukemumu i einen bie 126 4 8 5 Voice PE 129 29 SUMER 130 91 SOV SIT Eee 130 4 9 2 Upgrading SUSSW uasavrmeamuaddmnemnammsbidnsudn endda 132 4 9 3 SW Files in PN 133 4 9 4 Select by Nam uGumsanseassennndnnkostqannde cared jentene nennen 134 xiv BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Contents 4 9 5 Select by MAC Address rrnnrnnnannrnrrnnnannnnvnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnnnvennrnnannnnnnrnrnnnsnnnnnnne 134 EE EE ER EE EE RE 135 ADE ANSV Sunbeam nkedadnnsiagd 155 4 9 8 Clear All Configured SU SW Files rarnnnrrnnnnnnvonnnrnnrnnnnnrnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnnnnnne 155 4 10S rvic s MEN eee 156 4 10 1 Introduction to SembeSuuvssmednassepesmmnmavemdamumenekndeu 156 4 10 2 Introduction to Filtering Features eccseeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeneenes 164 4 10 3 Common Operations in Services Menu rrrrnnrnnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnvnnnnrnrrnnnnnrnnnn 165 4 10 4 The Services Menu rrnrnnnnnnnnvnnnrnnnvnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnernnannnnnnrnnnnnnennnnnnnsennnenee 166 4 10 5 Defining Local Service Profiles 2 h uumsunmsmsmnnemuuenunrmnneennveudie 196 4 10 6 Defining Local Permanent Services rrrrnnrnnnnnnrrrrnnnonnrrnnnrnnnnnnnrvrnrrnnnnennnnee 196 4 10 7 Defining RADIUS Based Services rrrnnnrnnnnnnnvnnnnvrnrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnrnnnnnrnnnn 197 4 10 8 Pre configured Poll s m rumassgemeiaeuesannumqteednmeunddn 197 4 11Para
235. ns select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Set as Main BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 225 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VolP Gateways In This Appendix Introduction on page 228 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 Service Profile on page 230 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 Service Profile on page 232 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 Service Profile on page 234 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 711 Service Profile on page 236 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B 1 B 1 1 E 228 Introduction This section describes the method used for defining the pre configured Service Profiles for Generic 3rd party VoIP devices that do not use the DRAP protocol and that cannot use Managed VoIP Services The same principles can be used for modifying the pre configured profiles or creating new ones for VoIP services that have different characteristics Priority Marking We distinguish between two types of Service Profiles for Generic VoIP devices Marking is not used This scenario is applicable when the VoIP device behind the SU does not support either DSCP or 802 1p marking to distinguish between different VoIP related traffic types or when such marking is not used for any reason The implication is that a single Continuous Grant connection should be used for all VoIP traffic Marking is used This scenario is applicable when the VoIP device is ca
236. nsumption of the 4 ODUs assuming DL UL Tx Rx ratio of 60 40 is 4 89 0 60 15 0 40 238W Thus the average maximum power consumption of the system under worst case conditions is 238 64 9 311W BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 39 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 2 4 Installing the Micro Base Station Unit The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location where the IF cable s enters the building The location of the indoor equipment should take into account its connection to the power source and to the base station networking equipment gt To install the Micro Base Station 1 40 Place the unit on a shelf desk or install it in a 19 cabinet For installation ina 21 cabinet attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the chassis Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw located on the rear panel of the unit marked and firmly tighten the grounding screw Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground earth connection or to the cabinet if applicable Connect the DATA port to the backbone data equipment use a straight Ethernet cable to connect to a hub switch router The maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m If the MGMT port will be used for remote management connect it to the appropriate data equipment use a straight Ethernet cable to connect toa hub switch router The maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m Con
237. nt System A system responsible for managing at least part of a network An NMS is generally a reasonably powerful and well equipped computer such as an engineering workstation NMSs communicate with agents to help keep track of network statistics and resources Network Operations Center The physical space from which a typically large telecommunications network is managed monitored and supervised Network Processing Unit Non Real Time is very similar to the Real Time polling service except that connections may utilize random access transmit opportunities for sending bandwidth requests These Non Real Time Variable Bit Rate NRT VBR services such as file transfer and Internet access with a minimum guaranteed rate are characterized by requirement for a guaranteed rate but can tolerate longer delays and are rather insensitive to jitter Service parameters include CIR Committed Time CT and MIR that limit the rate as otherwise bandwidth intensive services may expand to occupy full bandwidth Operation Administration amp Maintenance Provides the facilities and the personnel required to manage a network Outdoor Unit Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing A method for multiplexing signals which divides the available bandwidth into a series of frequencies known as tones Orthogonal tones do not interfere with each other when the peak of one tone corresponds with the null The rapid switching frequency hopping technique is
238. ntains the following chapters and appendices E Chapter 1 System description Describes the BreezeMAX system and its components E Chapter 2 Installation Describes how to install the Micro Base Station system components E Chapter 3 Commissioning Describes how to configure basic parameters and validate unit operation E Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Describes how to use the Monitor application for configuring parameters checking system status and monitoring performance E Appendix A Software Upgrade Describes how to load new software files using TFTP and how to switch to a new software version in BreezeMAX units E Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways Describes the principles of defining Service Profiles for 3rd party generic non DRAP based VoIP devices E Glossary A listing of commonly used terms E Index Contents Chapter 1 System Description 1 1 Introducing BreezeMAX uuuuamuanuanumuenmemnmennenbr dikene 2 fe Micro Base Statlon iummsummmseseimssssumeesneskeransenmutnnankea ndnnenknannakakenkannneknanadeneneanndn 5 1 2 1 Micro Base Station Indoor Unit sseernnnnvrorernnnnvnnnennnvvnnannnvvnnnnnnnenvnnnnnennnnnnnnnennn 5 SR weassactGensibaus aia E 6 1 2 3 Micro Base Station Radio Configurations rrrrrrnrrnvrrnnnnnnnvnnrnrnrrnnnnrnrrrnnnnnnnrnnnn 6 12AN CS EEE EE 8 1 3 Networking Equipment 2 0 ccceeessssnnnnenenesesnesnnnnecceaesceensngagescusns
239. nter the program The password must be changed during the session to a different permanent password The administrator should be notified of this new password Five consecutive errors in entering the temporary password will invalidate it In this case repeat this procedure to receive a new challenge string for a new temporary password Using the Monitor Program This section describes the Monitor program structure and navigation rules HM There are three access levels to the Monitor program The available actions depend on the access level password used for accessing the program Administrator Read Write permissions for all parameters The default password is admin Installer Read only permission for the Services menu and for the RADIUS menu Read Write permissions for all other options excluding the Change Password option The default password is installer Monitor Read only permissions for all parameters The default password is monitor Each menu or submenu specifies the unit type BreezeMAX uBST the IP address of the port used for accessing the Monitor program when using the MON port this is the IP address of the DATA port the running SW version BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 63 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 64 and a description of the menu When accessing the Monitor program using Telnet the IP address of the applicable port is displayed after the unit type Each menu or
240. nu 4 6 3 4 6 4 4 6 4 1 4 6 4 2 4 6 4 3 4 6 4 4 The selected Radio Cluster menu includes the following options E Show Select this option to view the current values defined for the selected Radio Cluster s parameters E Update Select this option to update one or more of the selected Radio Cluster s parameters For details on the configurable parameters Refer to Section 4 6 4 HM Delete Select this option to delete the selected Radio Cluster from the database Add Select this option to define a new Radio Cluster For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4 6 4 Radio Cluster Parameters Radio Cluster ID A number used to identify the Radio Cluster The Radio Cluster ID is configurable only when adding a new Radio Cluster The available values range from 1 to 4 Name A string of up to 32 printable characters used as the descriptive name of the Radio Cluster This is an optional descriptive parameter The default is an empty string Location A string of up to 255 printable characters used to describe the location of the Radio Cluster This is an optional descriptive parameter The default is the string defined as the Location parameter of the uBST Sector Heading The direction of the geographical sector defined in degrees from the north This is an optional descriptive parameter The values range is from 0 to 359 degrees from north The default value is 0 degrees from nort
241. ny reason BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 111 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 112 Radio Cluster Menu Radio Cluster is a logical entity used to describe and support management of the uBST s elements associated with specific geographical sectors A Radio Cluster represents one or several ODUs that serve through their directional antennas the same geographical sector Up to four Radio Clusters can be defined per uBST The Radio Cluster s must be defined prior to defining the relevant ODU s and Access Parameters including the Channel s The Radio Cluster menu includes the following options E Show Summary E Select E Add Show Summary Select this option to view the current status of all defined Radio Clusters For each defined Radio Cluster the display includes the following information E ID Radio Cluster ID 1 2 E Name The string that is used as the descriptive name of the Radio Cluster E Location The string that is used as the descriptive location of the Radio Cluster E Sector Heading The direction angle from the north of the geographical sector E Sector Beam Width The beam width of the antenna s used in the geographical sector Select Use this option and select an already defined Radio Cluster to open the Radio Cluster menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected Radio Cluster Operation and Administration Radio Cluster Me
242. oading process are maintained Monitor Inactivity Timeout The Monitor Inactivity Timeout parameter determines the amount of inactive time following which the unit automatically exits the Monitor program The time out duration can range from 0 to 60 minutes 0 means no inactivity timeout The default value is 10 minutes Configuration The Micro Base station Configuration menu enables viewing and updating general parameters parameters that define the functionality of the MGMT and DATA ports the properties of authorized management stations and bridging functionality It also enables configuring per Telnet session the types of messages that will be displayed upon occurrence of various events The Configuration menu includes the following options E General Parameters E Management Port E Data Port Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 3 1 4 5 3 1 1 4 5 3 1 2 4 5 3 1 3 E Authorized Managers E Bridge E Voice E Debug Stream General Parameters Select this option to view or configure the general uBST parameters E Device Name E Device Location E ATPC E Cell E Duplex E Synchronization Device Name The Device Name parameter provides identification information for the uBST The device name consists of up to 255 printable characters The default Device Name is a null string empty Device Location The Device Location parameter provides location information for the uBST
243. ociate the ODU with a Channel If the Configured ODU Frequency Band differs from the actual band supported by the ODU a mismatch trap will be sent by the uBST upon trying to associate it with a Channel and the association will be rejected Tx Power The Tx Power parameter defines the power level of the transmitted signal at the antenna port of the ODU The range is from 13 to 50 dBm using a 0 25 dBm resolution If the entered value is not compatible with the installed ODU a trap will be issued If the entered value is below the minimum supported by the ODU the actual power will be set to the minimum supported by the unit If the entered value is above the maximum supported by the ODU the power will be changed to the maximum value supported by the ODU The actually supported range is E 3 5 GHz units 24 to 34 dBm E 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 134 25 to 36 dBm E 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 137 new ODU HW ready for 10 MHz bandwidth 30 to 36 dBm The default is 28 dBm will be automatically changed to 30 in new 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 137 If the Diversity Mode is set to Fourth Order Diversity the Tx Power of the ODUs associated with Channels 2 4 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1 If the Diversity Mode is set to Second Order Diversity the Tx Power of the ODU associated with Channel 2 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1 Channels
244. ocol It is possible to define Any for either the IP Address or Protocol field but not for both fields The protocol can be TCP 6 UDP 17 or Any If the specified Protocol is either TCP 6 or UDP 17 either the Source or Destination can be defined The direction is applicable for both IP Address and Port The L3 L4 Filtering Rules menu enables defining new L3 L4 Filtering Rule viewing details of previously defined L3 L4 Filtering Rules and removing L3 L4 Filtering Rules from the database It is not possible to edit the parameters of an existing L3 L4 Filtering Rule The database can hold up to 255 L3 L4 Filtering Rules The configurable L3 L4 Filtering Rule parameters are Rule Name The name of the L3 L4 Rule The L3 L4 Rule Name is a string of 1 to 32 printable characters 4 10 4 8 2 2 IP Address A string of 4 decimal numbers where each number is in the range from 1 to 255 separated by dashes An empty entry means Any An Any IP Address means that the filter is defined only by the Protocol field and optionally by the Port and Port Direction for UDP or TCP protocols 4 10 4 8 2 3 Protocol 186 The protocol of the IP packet The applicable protocols are TCP 6 UDP 17 or Any An empty entry means Any and is applicable only if an IP Address is Operation and Administration Services Menu defined the combination of Any for both the IP Address and Protocol is not allowed 4 10 4 8 2 4 P
245. ode to a mode that is not supported will be rejected If there is a mismatch between the configured value and the mode supported by the AUs a suitable error message and trap will be sent and the system will not become operational until proper configuration is completed The default is TDD In the current release only TDD mode is supported and the Duplex Mode should not be changed BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 79 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 1 5 2 80 A change in the configured Duplex Mode is applied only after reset DL UL Ratio Applicable only when the Duplex Mode is set to TDD Defines the ratio of transmit Down Link time to receive Up Link time in percents The available values are 1 65 35 2 60 40 3 55 45 4 50 50 5 45 55 6 40 60 7 35 65 When Sub channelization is enabled Minimum Number of Sub Channels is other than 16 some DL UL Ratios are not supported for certain combinations of Bandwidth Minimum Allocation and Maximum Cell Radius E For 3 5 MHz bandwidth and Minimum Allocation of 5 Symbols UL DL Ratios of 65 35 and 60 40 are not supported regardless of Maximum Cell Radius UL DL Ratio of 55 45 is not supported for Maximum Cell Radius of 30 km or higher E For 3 5 MHz bandwidth and Minimum Allocation of 3 Symbols UL DL Ratio of 65 35 is not supported regardless of Maximum Cell Radius UL DL Ratio of 60 40 is not supported for Maximum Cell Radius of 20 km
246. on Guidelines Table 2 8 GPS Adapter Connectors source indication Name Connector Functionality BASE STATION 15 pin D Type jack E 1PPS and 16MHz synchronization signals LVDS interface to the INTERFACE Micro Base Station HM Power 12 VDC from the Micro Base Station E Serial control signals RS 442 interface from the Micro Base Station CMD 9 pin D Type jack Serial control signals RS 232 interface to the Indoor GPS Receiver 1PPS IN BNC jack 1PPS signal TTL levels from Indoor GPS Receiver ODU GPS RJ 45 jack E 1PPS RS 442 interface from Outdoor GPS Receiver E Serial control signals RS 422 interface to Outdoor GPS Receiver HM Power 12 VDC to Outdoor GPS Receiver 4 GND Grounding Screw Connection to ground earth Table 2 9 GPS Adapter LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Input power E Off Power input failure indication E Green 12 VDC power supply from NPU is OK 1PPS 1PPS signal E Blinking Green 1PPS signal from GPS Receiver is detected indication E Red 1PPS signal is not detected Active GPS ODU ODU GPS E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is ODU Outdoor selection indication E Off ODU GPS Receiver is not selected Active GPS IDU IDU GPS E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is IDU Indoor selection indication E Off IDU GPS Receiver is not selected Active GPS INT INT GPS E Green indicates that the selected GP
247. onnected to the SU This is applicable for Alvarion s gateways supporting the DRAP protocol and or SIP VoIP gateways using a Managed VoIP Service For each gateway the following details are provided E Gateway Type applicable only for gateways that use DRAP HM Protocol DRAP or Dynamic where Dynamic indicates a SIP gateway using a Manasged VoIP Service E IP Address E VLAN ID management E Number Of Active Calls applicable only for Voice Gateways The following gateways that support DRAP are currently available from Alvarion E IDU NG 4D1W A Networking Gateway that serves also as an SU IDU supporting 4 data ports and 1 Wireless LAN port HM AVG 1D1V A stand alone external Voice Gateway supporting 1 data port and 1 POTS port E AVG 1D2V A stand alone external Voice Gateway supporting 1 data port and 2 POTS ports Ethernet Port The Ethernet Port menu enables configuration of the Ethernet port operation mode speed and duplex Show The Show option enables viewing the configured and actual operation modes E Current Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation E Current Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 145 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 6 3 6 2 4 9 6 3 7 4 9 6 3 8 E 4 9 6 3 8 1 4 9 6 3 8 2 146 E Configured Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation E Configured Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex NA if Configured Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation is set to
248. onnection between two points on the network such as a base station and a service provider or corporate network Identified by the VPL ID with functionality that is similar to VLAN ID VLAN on the backbone network BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Glossary VPN WAN WCS WEEE WIMAX Virtual Private Network A private network of computers that s at least partially connected by public lines A good example would be a private office LAN that allows users to log in remotely over the Internet an open public system VPNs use encryption and secure protocols like PPTP to ensure that data transmissions are not intercepted by unauthorized parties Wide Area Network A computer network that spans a relatively large geographical area Wide area networks can be made up of interconnected smaller networks spread throughout a building a state or the entire globe Wireless Communications Services The variety of services available using frequencies in the 2 3 GHz band for general fixed wireless use Waste Electronic and Electrical Equipment The purpose of Directive 2002 96 EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE is as a first priority the prevention of waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE and in addition the reuse recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as to reduce the disposal of waste It also seeks to improve the environmental performance of all operators involved in the
249. or Permanent SUs The SU can contain two SW versions E Main Each time the SU resets it will reboot using the version defined as Main E Shadow Normally the Shadow version is the backup version Each time a new SW File is downloaded to the SU it will be stored as a Shadow version replacing the previous Shadow Version The process of upgrading to a new SW version is controlled by the uBST and is performed using one of the SU SW files installed in the uBST If the specified SU SW file does not exist in the SU it will be downloaded to the SU and the requested operation will be executed as described below If it already exists in the SU then actual loading is not necessary The following options are available in the SW Version Control menu E Show SW Versions E SW File Show SW Versions Select this option to view the following information E Configured SW the version to be used network entry Details BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 139 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Configured SW File Name Configured SW Version Configured Action E SW Versions in SU Main SW File Name Main SW Version Shadow SW File Name Shadow SW Version Running From Main or Shadow E Available Versions in uBST The available SU SW file names and the SW Version of each file 4 9 6 2 6 SW File Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SU after n
250. or higher UL DL Ratio of 55 45 is not supported for Maximum Cell Radius of 50 km E For 5 MHz bandwidth and Minimum Allocation of 5 Symbols UL DL Ratio of 65 35 is not supported for Maximum Cell Radius of 40 KM or higher These combination will be rejected by the device and a suitable trap will be issued For all other combinations of Bandwidth and Micro Base Station Service Type all DL UL Ratios are supported for all values of Maximum Cell Radius The default is 50 50 A change in the configured DL UL Ratio is applied only after reset Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 3 1 6 4 5 3 1 6 1 CAUTION The DL UL Ratio of all Base Stations in the same coverage area neighboring cells must be set to the same value to ensure optimal performance and avoid uplink saturation Synchronization The Synchronization menu includes the following options E Clock E Chain E GPS Info Clock The Clock parameters define the source for the main clocks in the system These parameters are applied after reset The Clocks menu enables viewing updating the following parameters 4 5 3 1 6 1 1 External 1PPS Clock The 1PPS Pulse Per Second clock is used to determine the air frame start time Assuming that all systems use the same air frame size and DL UL Ratio then when the 1PPS clock is received from a GPS system this mechanism ensures inter site and intra site synchronization among all sectors
251. or permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 2 meter from all persons and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Indoor CPE To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1 1307and 2 1091 of FCC Rules the antenna used for this transmitter must be kept at a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Outdoor CPE To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1 1307 and 2 1091 of FCC Rules the antenna be used for this transmitter must be fixed mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 120 cm from all persons and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter R amp TTE Compliance Statement This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3 of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Safety Considerations General vi For the following safety considerations Instrument means the BreezeMAX units components and their cables BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Legal Rights Grounding Micro Base Stations and outdoor units are required to be bonded to protective grounding using the bonding stud or screw provided with each unit The Micro Base Station shall be bonded to earth at final installation Safety Considerations
252. ort The TDP UCP port number which is applicable only if the Protocol parameter is configured to a value of either 6 TCP or 17 UDP The Port is defined by a number in the range from 0 to 65534 4 10 4 8 2 5 Port Direction 4 10 4 9 4 10 4 9 1 4 10 4 9 2 The direction Source or Destination of the Port and the IP Address Indicates whether the Port number and IP address are for the relevant Source or Destination field in the IP frame Interface Filtering The Interface Filtering menu enables viewing and editing the filtering mechanisms to be used on frames received from the network From Network Filtering and from the wireless link From Wireless Filtering The Interface Filtering menu also enables viewing and resetting the Filtering Rules Counters which display for each of the applicable rules the number of frames matching the rule accumulated since the last reset In addition there is a Non Matching counter displaying the number of frames that did not match any of the relevant rules The counters will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status For each of the interfaces the configurable parameters are L2 Filtering Rules List The L2 Filtering Rules List submenu enables viewing details on the L2 Filtering Rules assigned to the interface adding Rules from the L2 Filtering Rules lists to the list of Rules assigned to the interface and deleting one or all Rules from the list It
253. ounters 153 SU MAC Address Service 169 SU Ports Counters 153 SU Status 138 SU Type 130 SU Wireless Port Counters 154 Subnet Mask Data Port 89 Management Port 86 Frequency Phy Standard FDD Subscriber Admin Status 168 Definition 156 Description 168 First Name 168 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 263 Index Last Name 168 Menu 167 Name 168 Subscriber Name 168 SUID 131 Suppression Interval 96 SW File SU 140 SW Files in Micro Base Station 133 SW Versions Control Micro Base Station 73 su 139 y Temporary 160 Temporary Grace Licenses 101 Termination Action 161 Time Zone Offset From UTC 83 Transparent Marking Mode 176 Trap Configuration 95 Admin Status 96 Severity 96 Suppression Interval 96 Traps Display Filter 94 Log 95 Traps Display Filter Days 94 Minimum Severity 94 Tx Power ODU 118 U UDP Port Accounting Server 109 Authentication 107 Unicast Relaying 180 Unit Control Micro Base Station 71 SU 138 Unknown Forwarding Policy 180 Update General Service Parameters 167 ODU 117 Uplink Tx Frequency SU Phy Standard FDD Parameters 144 Uplink Basic Rate Micro Base Station 128 Uplink QoS Profiles 182 Uplink Upper Priority Limits 181 User Name 142 V VLAN Classification Mode 170 VLAN List 169 VLAN Transparency Mode 174 Voice Parameters Micro Base Station 129 Voice Service 158 Voice Networking Gateways SU 145
254. ously defined Subscribers and removing Subscribers from the database The Subscriber entity is applicable only to Permanent Services services that are defined in the uBST s database and are provisioned to Permanent SUs BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 167 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 2 1 4 10 4 2 2 4 10 4 2 3 4 10 4 2 4 4 10 4 2 5 4 10 4 3 168 The Subscribers database in the uBST can hold up to 1024 Subscribers The configurable Subscriber s parameters are Subscriber Name This is the name of the subscriber which must be unique for the entire network A Subscriber Name consists of 1 to 32 printable characters First Name An optional parameter for information purposes A First Name consists of up to 50 printable characters Last Name An optional parameter for information purposes A Last Name consists of up to 50 printable characters Description An optional parameter for information purposes A Description consists of up to 50 printable characters Admin Status The administrative status of the Subscriber can be either Enabled or Disabled Select Disabled to disable all services to the Subscriber Services There are two types of Services A Permanent Service is defined locally in the database of the Micro Base Station and it defines a Service to be provisioned to a Permanent SU A Temporary Service can only be granted to a Temporary SU Typically Temporary
255. p M staff with a unified scalable and distributable network management system AlvariSTAR system uses a distributed client server architecture which provides the service provider with a robust scalable and fully redundant network management system in which all single points of failure can be avoided AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality E Device Discovery E Device Inventory E Topology BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 11 Chapter 1 System Description 1 4 2 E Fault Management E Configuration Management E Service Management E Data Collection E Performance Monitoring E Device embedded software upgrade E Security Management E Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems Embedded with the entire knowledge base of BWA network operations AlvariSTAR is a unique state of the art power multiplier in the hands of the service provider that enables the provisioning of satisfied customers AlvariSTAR dramatically extends the abilities of the service provider to provide a rich portfolio of services and to support rapid customer base expansion AlvariCRAFT Alvarion s AlvariCRAFT is an SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol application designed for on line management of BreezeMAX system components This utility simplifies the installation and maintenance of small size installations by easily enabling the change of settings or firmware upgrade for one Micro Base Stat
256. p to 1024 Service Profiles The configurable Service Profile s parameters are Service Profile Name A Service Profile Name consists of 1 to 32 printable characters Service Type The Service Type of the Service Profile The Service Type parameter is configurable only when defining a new Service Profile Add It is not changeable The currently available Service Type options are BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 173 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 4 3 174 1 L2 2 PPPoE 3 Voice 4 Managed VoIP For more details refer to Section 4 10 1 2 VLAN Transparency Mode The VLAN Transparency Mode defines the method of transferring packets to the operator s upstream network When set to On data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred transparently The VPL ID parameter is not applicable to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode On Also the Forwarding Rule selection parameter is not applicable to transparent Service Profiles All transparent Service Profiles share a single pre configured Forwarding Rule and a pre configured QoS Profile for multicasts For details on these profiles refer to Table 4 19 and Table 4 20 The pre configured Transparent Forwarding Rule can be modified but not deleted E For tagged packets the VPL ID will be their VLAN tag E For untagged packets the VPL ID will be None For packets received from the network the forwarding deci
257. pable of marking the different VoIP related traffic types The assumption is that 3 different priority marks are used One for RTP traffic the second for RTCP and VolP Signaling and a third one for Data Device Management General Assumptions Protocol Header 18 bytes for Ethernet L2 header including 4 bytes for VLAN plus 40 bytes of IP UDP RTP headers A total of 58 bytes RTCP bandwidth RFC 3556 Session Description Protocol SDP Bandwidth Modifiers for RTP Control Protocol RTCP Bandwidth states that normally the amount of bandwidth allocated to RTCP in an RTP session is 5 of the session bandwidth To be on the safe side allocate 10 of the RTP bandwidth to RTCP VoIP Signaling Cisco states that its IP Phones generate approximately 150 bps signaling traffic without L2 overhead To be on the safe side assume 2 Kbps of VoIP Signaling traffic for each POTS interface Fax Fax services are assumed to be based on T 38 Fax Relay Protocol Header is assumed to be 58 bytes same as for RTP BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Introduction E Data Data traffic may include ARP DHCP TFTP SNMP HTTP and other management protocols The recommended default bandwidth value is up to 64 Kbps if a Best Effort connection is used for this traffic If a Continuous Grant service is used for all VoIP related traffic a lower bandwidth will be allocated to Data traffic Note that the use of bandwidth consuming protocols when a
258. pplicable lists The Priority Classifier menu enables viewing all Priority Classifiers in the database defining new Priority Classifiers editing details of previously defined Priority Classifiers and removing Priority Classifiers from the database The Priority Classifiers database can hold up to 255 Priority Classifiers The configurable Priority Classifier s parameters are Priority Classifier Name A Priority Classifier Name consists of 1 to 32 printable characters Priority Type The prioritization mechanism used by the Priority Classifier The available options are 1 DSCP 2 802 1p Uplink Upper Priority Limits The Uplink Upper Priority Limits parameter enables to define up to four ranges where each range may be assigned a different QoS Profile for uplink communication The list includes up to 4 numbers separated by commas where BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 181 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 6 4 4 10 4 6 5 4 10 4 6 6 4 10 4 6 7 4 10 4 7 182 each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the highest available for the applicable priority type 7 for 802 1p 63 for DSCP Examples for acceptable lists DSCP Priority 10 30 50 63 21 42 63 20 63 63 802 1p Priority 2 4 6 7 1 5 7 6 7 7 A ranges list of 21 42 63 means that packets with a priority from 0 to 21 will be transmitted using the first QoS Profile defined i
259. pplicable only for L2 and Managed VoIP Service types 1 Disabled 2 Enabled Yes Unknown Forwarding Policy Applicable only for L2 and Managed VoIP Service types 1 Reject 2 Forward Yes Multicast QoS Profile A QoS Profile Name 1 to 32 printable characters that exists in the database Yes Services Priority Classifiers Parameters Priority Classifier Name 1 to 32 printable characters Yes Priority Type 1 DSCP 2 802 1p Yes Uplink Priority Ranges Up to 4 numbers separated by commas where each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the highest available for the applicable priority type 7 for 802 1p 63 for DSCP Yes BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 217 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Uplink QoS Profiles Up to four QoS Profile Names Yes separated by commas where each name 1 to 32 printable characters is a name of a QoS Profile that exists in the database The number of entries in the list must be identical to number of entries in Uplink Priority Ranges list Downlink Priority Ranges Up to 4 numbers separated by commas Yes where each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the highest available for the applicable priority type
260. preventing cross interference and saturation problems When using the internal 1PPS clock derived from the selected 16 MHz clock source only intra site synchronization among sectors can be achieved In a slave unit the External 1 PPS Clock is not configurable and it is set to Enable the clock is received from the previous unit in the chain In a master unit the available options are Enable use external 1PPS clock source and Disable use internal 1PPS clock source derived from the selected 16 MHz clock The default is Enable 4 5 3 1 6 1 2 External 16 MHz Clock The 16 MHz clock source is used for generation of all main clocking signals in the system including the internal 1PPS clock Using an external accurate 16 MHz clock source will enable better hold over of the 1PPS clock upon temporary loss or reduced reliability when receiving less than 4 satellites of the external 1PPS clock This will allow a longer time of continued operation before appearance of interferences due to clock drifts among Base Stations BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 81 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 1 6 2 In a slave unit the External 16 MHz Clock is not configurable and it is set to Enable the clock is received from the previous unit in the chain In a master unit the available options are Enable use external 16 MHz clock source and Disable use internal 16 MHz clock source The default is Disable In the
261. process of creating a backup file an error message will be displayed specifying the reason gt To upload download the Backup File After the backup file has been created it can be uploaded using a DOS based TFTP Client application to a target directory To upload the file use the command tftp i lt Port IP address gt get lt file name gt lt destination address gt The default file name is E Full backup res E Profiles profiles res E Profiles and Services profiles srvcs res BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 75 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration x 4 5 2 6 4 5 3 76 E Filtering filtering res E Traps Configuration Traps_Config res E BS License File BSLicense lt Management Port MAC Address gt res The file is encrypted and cannot be edited However it can be downloaded to other uBST s using a DOS based TFTP Client application with the command tftp i lt Port IP address gt put lt file name gt The target BST will decrypt the backup file extract all the configuration files and databases and will store them replacing existing files databases The uBST should be reset to apply the downloaded configuration NOTE To avoid loss of connectivity behind a router the basic IP parameters of the MGMT and DATA ports IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway are not changed when loading a Full backup file to the uBST The values of these parameters configured in the target BST before the l
262. provides the appropriate service s or rejects the SU 7 Part of the information sent from the RADIUS server can include the Authentication Time Out Before the end of this time the Micro Base Station should re authenticate the SU with the RADIUS server This allows the operator to stop service for a customer even if the SU was not reset and the network entry process was not re started A RADIUS server can be used for authentication purposes only for accounting purposes only or for both authentication and accounting purposes Up to two servers of each type can be defined Each server of each type Authentication accounting can be defined as either Primary or Secondary Only one server of each type can be defined as Primary If two servers of a certain type are defined then upon first trial of an authentication accounting transaction the Micro Base Station will attempt to communicate with the Primary server of the relevant type provided the server s Operation Status is Up If it cannot communicate with the Primary server it will attempt communicating with the other server and vice versa Upon succeeding to communicate with a certain server this server is defined as Active and the other one as Standby As long as the Micro Base Station succeeds to communicate with an Active Authentication Accounting server it will continue using it for authentication accounting transactions The RADIUS menu includes three sub menus E General Param
263. providing two advantages E Ability to connect SUs with relatively poor link conditions reducing the amount of uplink sub channels from 16 full bandwidth to 8 4 2 or 1 sub channels enables increasing the maximum transmit power of the SU by 3 6 9 or 12 dBm respectively E Better utilization of uplink capacity by enabling several SUs to share the bandwidth at the same time The available options are 1 2 4 8 and 16 full bandwidth sub channels A value of 16 means that sub channelization is disabled The default is 1 sub channels full OFDMA support Changes in Minimum Number of Sub channels are applied only after reset Operation and Administration Access Parameters Menu 4 8 4 4 4 8 5 4 8 5 1 4 8 5 2 Downlink Basic Rate The Downlink Basic Rate is the minimum rate to be used by the Multirate algorithm in all downlinks This is also the rate to be used for downlink broadcasts and multicasts Multicasts and broadcasts are sent to multiple recipients with different link qualities Therefore it is preferable to use a relatively low rate for these transmissions thus reducing the probability of errors and increasing the likelihood that all intended recipients will receive them properly This is also the initial rate to be used by the algorithm for each new SU that joins the cell when the Multirate algorithm is enabled The available options are listed in Table 4 4 The default rate is the lowest rate BP
264. ransfer ATM was designed to support multiple services such as voice graphics data and full motion video It allows service providers to dynamically assign bandwidth to individual customers Automatic Transmit Power Control Access Unit Best effort A service where neither throughput nor delay guarantees are provided The subscriber unit sends requests for bandwidth in either random access slots or dedicated transmission opportunities The occurrence of dedicated opportunities is subject to network load and the subscriber unit cannot rely on their presence Service parameters include Committed Time CT and Maximum Information Rate MIR Glossary BER BPSK BST BW BWA CBR CG CIR CPE CPLD CRC CSMA CD 240 Bit Error Rate In a digital transmission BER is the percentage of bits with errors divided by the total number of bits that have been transmitted received or processed over a given time period Binary Phase Shift Keying A data transfer technique BPSK transmits data using two phase modulation signals one phase representing a binary one and the other representing a binary zero The signal is divided into bits their status is determined by the preceding wave If the wave changes for example the signal is reversed Base Station Bandwidth Broadband Wireless Access Constant Bit Rate Continuous Grant Also known as Unsolicited Grant Services UGS is tailored for carrying constant bit rate CBR
265. ration files and databases in the system The following backup file types can be created Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu E Full The entire UBST configuration excluding Passwords and basic IP parameters of the MGMT and DATA ports IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway E Profiles All the profiles associated with services Service Profiles Forwarding Rules Priority Classifiers QoS Profiles E Profiles and Services All the profiles and configurations associated with service General Service parameters Subscribers Services Service Profiles Forwarding Rules Priority Classifiers QoS Profiles E Filtering All the configurations of Filtering Rules Interface Filtering and MAC Address Deny List E Traps The configuration parameters for all traps E BS License File All license related information including total available and used licenses CPEs with allocated licenses local or permanent CPEs with grace or temporary grace licenses and CPEs for which grace license expired Upon selecting the backup type option you will be requested to confirm the request After confirmation a message is displayed indicating that the backup file creation is in process Upon successful completion of the process a completion message will be displayed If a backup file of the same type already exists in the uBST you will be asked whether to overwrite the existing file If there was an error in the
266. reating within the BreezeMAX network virtual groups of multiple end users stations belonging to the same organization Subscriber They may also be used to differentiate between different end users stations connected to the same SU In the backbone VPL ID Virtual Private Link ID is used VPL is a virtual connection between two points on the network such as a base station and a service provider or corporate network identified by the VPL ID with functionality that is similar to VLAN ID VLAN on the backbone network Typically it is used to separate between different traffic types e g Data and VoIP or traffic to from different ISPs or different corporate networks If the VPL ID is None No VPL ID and VLAN Transparency Mode is Off frames arriving from the infrastructure side with a VLAN ID tag will be discarded Tagged frames arriving from the wireless domain will be forwarded without a VLAN tag unless 802 1p Priority Marking is used If 802 1p Priority Marking is used tagged frames will be forwarded with VPL ID 0 and the defined Priority Marking Value If the VPL ID is other than None applicable only if VLAN Transparency Mode is Off all untagged frames forwarded to the network will be tagged with the VPL ID The VLAN ID in tagged frames arriving from the wireless network will be replaced by the VPL ID BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 161 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration The guidelines that should
267. requency Preferred BST AU ID Preferred BST AU ID Mask Best BST AU Table displaying for each AU Micro Base Station with which the SU can communicate including the selected AU Micro Base Station the following parameters BST AU ID Downlink Rx Frequency MHz SNR dB Rx Antenna 4 9 6 3 10 2 Update The Update option enables configuration of the following parameters changes in Best BST AU parameters take effect only after reset 4 9 6 3 10 2 1Best BST AU Support The Best BST AU Support parameter allows enabling of disabling the Best BST AU feature in the SU If the Best BST AU Support feature is disabled the SU will start scanning in the range defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask and select the first found AU Micro Base Station 148 Operation and Administration SU Menu 4 9 6 3 10 2 2Preferred BST AU ID and Preferred BST AU ID Mask These two parameters define the initial range for scanning in order to find the best AU Micro Base Station The SU will select the best AU Micro Base Station within this range If no AU Micro Base Station is found within this range the SU will continue searching in the entire range defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask parameters The Preferred BST AU ID and Preferred BST AU ID Mask consist of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each where the range of each group is 0 to 255 The first 3 groups form the base address mask for the Operator ID The next 2 groups form
268. respect to the Firmware Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual iii Legal Rights release to its Customers firmware updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates Additional hardware if required to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD Disclaimer a The Software is sold on an AS IS basis Alvarion its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AN
269. ress gt lt Number gt 4 10 4 3 1 2 Subscriber Name The Subscriber to which the Service is allocated The Subscriber Name must be that of a Subscriber that exists in the database The Subscriber Name is not applicable to a temporary Service 4 10 4 3 1 3 Service Profile Name The Service Profile to be used in the Service The Service Profile Name must be that of a Service Profile that exists in the database 4 10 4 3 1 4 SU MAC Address The MAC Address of the SU associated with the Service The SU MAC Address must be that of a Permanent SU that exists in the database The MAC Address can be changed in Update option only if the Admin status of the Service is set to Disabled 4 10 4 3 1 5 VLAN List A list of VLAN IDs listing the VLAN IDs behind the SU associated with the applicable Subscriber The list includes VLAN IDs each one in the range of 0 to 4094 separated by commas Select null empty string for No VLAN The VLAN List is not displayed in Show menus if the list is empty BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 169 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration When Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off the VLAN List can include up to 16 VLAN IDs When Hybrid VLAN Mode is On the VLAN List can include up to 15 VLAN IDs the 16th entry is reserved for No VLAN The maximum total number of VLAN IDs behind a single SU is 16 15 when there is a Service with Hybrid VLAN Mode On is assigned to the SU Refer to S
270. rovided and for what fee Small and Medium sized Enterprises SMEs are small scale entrepreneurial private enterprises they are usually defined as having less than 250 employees but most have far fewer Sub Network Access Protocol BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Glossary SNMP SNR SOHO SRC SU TCP TCP IP TDD TDM Simple Network Management Protocol A network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices and to manage configurations statistics collection performance and security SNMP works by sending messages called protocol data units PDUs to different parts of a network SNMP compliant devices called agents store data about themselves in Management Information Bases MIBs and return this data to the SNMP requesters Signal to Noise Ratio The ratio of the amplitude of a desired analog or digital data signal to the amplitude of noise in a transmission channel at a specific point in time SNR is typically expressed logarithmically in decibels dB SNR measures the quality of a transmission channel or a signal over a network channel The greater the ratio the easier it is to identify and subsequently isolate and eliminate the effects of noise SNR also is abbreviated as S N Small Office Home Office A term that refers to the small or home office environment and the business culture that surrounds it Typically it refers to an office or business with te
271. rs 147 Best BST AU Support 148 Best BST AU Table 148 Best Effort BE QoS Profile 183 Bridge Aging Time Micro Base Station 93 su 147 Bridging Parameters SU 146 Broadcast Relaying 180 Bronze LAN to LAN Pre Configured Profile 198 Bronze Teleworking Pre Configured Profile 198 BST AU ID 149 BST AU ID Mask 149 Burst Error Rate Counters Micro Base Station 99 su 154 C Calculated Local Date and Time 85 Cell ID 79 Cell Parameters 79 CG 183 Chain Number 82 Chain Parameters 82 Change Password 72 Channel Admin Status 125 Associated ODU 125 Associated Radio Cluster 126 Downlink Tx Frequency 125 Frequency Band 126 Select 125 Tx Power 126 Uplink Rx Frequency 126 CIR 184 Clear All Configured SU SW Files SU 155 Clock Mode 82 Clock Parameters 81 256 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Index Committed Information Rate 184 Committed Time 184 Configuration Micro Base Station 76 su 141 Configured Action su 131 Configured SW File Name su 131 Configured SW Version su 131 Connectors AU ODU 34 GPS Adapter 44 Micro Base Station 37 Continuous Grant CG QoS Profile 183 Counters Burst Error Rate Micro base Station 99 Burst Error Rate SU 154 Data Port 98 Management Port 97 Micro Base Station 97 SU Ethernet Port 153 SU Ports 153 SU Wireless Port 154 Wireless Port Micro Base Station 98 Country 142 CPEs License Bank 100 Create Backup 74
272. rs of a server it must first be deleted and then defined again through the Add Server option The Authentication menu includes the following options E Show All E Add Server E Select Server Show All Select this option to view the current status and parameters of all defined Authentication servers For each defined Authentication server the following details are displayed E IP Address E UDP Port E Server Status Primary or Secondary E Operation Status Up or Down according to the keep alive mechanism E Activity Status Active or Standby indicates whether this is the server currently in use for authentication purposes Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 7 2 2 4 5 7 2 2 1 4 5 7 2 2 2 4 5 7 2 2 3 4 5 7 2 3 Add Server Select this option to define a new Authentication server Up to two Authentication servers can be defined You will be prompted to configure the following parameters IP Address The IP address of the Authentication server The default is null IP address must be defined Refer to the limitations described in IP Addresses Configuration on page 65 UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for authentication transactions Valid values 1 to 65535 The default value is 1812 RFC 2865 requirement Server Status Defines whether this server is Primary or Secondary Each Authentication server can be defined as either Primary
273. rth Order Diversity for LOS and NLOS No Diversity Yes Causes automatic reset Channel ID 1 4 BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 209 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Run Time Updated Default Associated ODU 1 4 must be a defined ODU ID No Downlink Tx Frequency MHz According to the Configured ODU Frequency Band and Bandwidth No Admin Status 1 Disable 2 Enable Disable No Access Parameters Multirate Multirate Enable Disable 1 Disable 2 Enable Disable is temporary until next reset Enable Yes Uplink Basic Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 2 BPSK 3 4 3 QPSK 1 2 4 QPSK 3 4 not applicable for TDD 5 QAM16 1 2 6 QAM16 3 4 7 QAM64 2 3 8 QAM64 3 4 BPSK 1 2 Yes Minimum Number of Sub Channels 1 2 4 8 16 Downlink Basic Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 2 BPSK 3 4 not applicable for TDD 3 QPSK 1 2 4 QPSK 3 4 5 QAM16 1 2 6 QAM16 3 4 7 QAM64 2 3 8 QAM64 3 4 BPSK 1 2 Yes Access Parameters Voice Parameters Maximum Number of Voice Calls 0 50 50 Yes 210 Operation and Administration Parameters Summary Table 4 21 Micro Base Station Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Minimum
274. rver Accounting 109 Authentication 107 Address 142 Admin Status Channel 125 Interface Filtering 188 ODU 119 Service 171 Subscriber 168 Trap Configuration 96 Administrator Password 72 Advanced Service Mode 160 Alarms and Traps 94 Altitude 85 Antenna Selection 137 Associated ODU 125 Associated Radio Cluster 117 ATPC Enable Disable 78 ATPC Parameters 77 AU ODU Connectors 34 Installation 28 LEDs 34 Authentication Activity Status 106 Add Server 107 Delete Selected Server 107 Index IP Address 107 Operation Status 106 Select Server 107 Server Status 107 Show All 106 Show Selected Server 107 Statistics 107 UDP Port 107 Authentication Parameters 106 Authorized Managers Add 92 IP Address 92 Parameters 92 Read Community 92 Select 92 Send Traps 92 Show All 92 Write Community 92 Auto Negotiation Option Data Port 90 Management Port 88 B Backup File BS License File 75 Creating 74 Filtering 75 Full 75 Profiles 75 Profiles and Services 75 Traps Configuration 75 Upload Download 75 Bandwidth Micro Base Station 123 SU Phy Standard FDD Parameters 143 SU Radio Parameters Advanced Si 150 Base Station ID Micro Base Station 121 SU MAC Standard FDD Parameters 143 Base Station ID Mask SU MAC Standard FDD Parameters 143 Base Station Licenses 101 Basic Parameters 50 BE 183 BER Test 99 Best BST AU Paramete
275. s Discarded The number of bytes discarded from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link identical to Bytes Dropped Packets Submitted The number of packets submitted by upper layers to this connection Packets Transmitted The number of packets transmitted to the wireless port through this connection excluding retransmissions Packets Dropped The number of packets dropped from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link identical to Packets Discarded Packets Discarded The number of packets discarded from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link identical to Packets Dropped Average Delay The average packet delay in milliseconds measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds Delay Variance The variance the standard deviation squared of the packet delay in milliseconds squared measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds Maximum Delay The maximum packet delay in milliseconds measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds Data Loss Indicator The percentage of dropped packets out of the total demand measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 4 4 4 10 4 4 1 4 10 4 4 2 DLI 100 Packets Dropped Packets S
276. s market leading knowledge of Broadband Wireless Access BWA industry leadership proven field experience and core technologies including many years of experience with OFDM technology Built from the ground up based on the IEEE 802 16 ETSI HIPERMAN standards BreezeMAX is designed specifically to meet the unique requirements of the wireless Metropolitan Area Network MAN environment and to deliver broadband access services to a wide range of customers including residential SOHO SME and multi tenant customers Its Media Access Control MAC protocol was designed for point to multipoint broadband wireless access applications providing a very efficient use of the wireless spectrum and supporting difficult user environments The access and bandwidth allocation mechanisms accommodate hundreds of subscriber units per channel with subscriber units that may support different services to multiple end users The system uses OFDM radio technology which is robust in adverse channel conditions and enables operation in non line of sight links This allows easy installation and improves coverage while maintaining a high level of spectral efficiency In the uplink the system uses OFDMA 16 supporting N x Subscriber Units per Symbol N 1 to 16 Modulation and coding can be adapted per burst ever striving to achieve a balance between robustness and efficiency in accordance with prevailing link conditions BreezeMAX supports a wide range of network servic
277. se Station equipment Table 2 7 Electrical Specifications Micro Base Station Equipment Unit Details Power Source 40 5 to 60 VDC Power Supply efficiency 80 minimum Power Consumption excluding ODUs 53W typical 64W maximum AU ODU HP 2 x GHz Tx DL 89W maximum 75W typical Rx UL 15W maximum 9W typical AU ODU HP 3 x GHz Tx DL 90W maximum 62W typical Rx UL 20W maximum 14W typical GPS Adapter 12 VDC from the NPU 1 2W maximum Indoor GPS Receiver Power Source 36 to 72 VDC Power Dissipation 20W maximum 12W typical Outdoor GPS Receiver 12 VDC from the uBST via the GPS Adapter 6W maximum Example A full 2 x GHz Micro Base Station operating with DL UL ratio of 60 40 with 4 ODUs a GPS Adapter and an Outdoor GPS Receiver Maximum power consumption of the Micro Base Station IDU 64 W Maximum power consumption of the GPS components 6 GPS Receiver 1 2 GPS Adapter 0 8 Efficiency 9W When calculating the power requirements associated with the ODUs we should distinguish between the peak power consumption maximum current and the average power consumption taking into account Tx Rx ratio that affect the requirements from a backup power source For a 2 x GHz system the peak power consumption of the 4 ODUs is 4 89 0 8 445W Thus the total peak power of the system under worst conditions is 64 9 445 518W The average maximum power co
278. sion will be according to the packet s VPL ID If the VPL ID is unknown either None or not included in the list of VPL IDs defined for any of the existing non transparent Service Profiles the system will assume this is a transparent VLAN packet if at least one transparent Service is defined and transfer it with the original VLAN tag or untagged if there is no VLAN tag NOTE The combination of VLAN Transparency Service On Hybrid VLAN Mode Off and an empty VLAN List means that all packets are forwarded This combination should be used only if the Service Provider can ensure that there will not be conflicts between VLAN IDs used by devices behind the SU and existing VPL IDs When set to Off data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred with a VLAN tag according to the VPL ID The VLAN ID in tagged frames arriving from the wireless network will be replaced by the VPL ID For packets received from the network the forwarding decision will be according to the Forwarding Rule defined in the Service Profile with a matching VPL ID Operation and Administration Services Menu x 4 10 4 4 4 4 10 4 4 5 To avoid conflicts a transparent Service Profile cannot be assigned to a Service if the Service s VLAN ID list includes a VLAN ID that is equal to any of the already assigned VPL IDs NOTE The combination VLAN Transparency Mode On Hybrid VLAN Mode On and an empty VLAN List means that only untagged
279. start at the same System Description The Micro Base Station 1 2 4 1 1 2 4 2 1 2 4 3 time and that all sectors will switch from transmit downlink to receive uplink at the same time This synchronization is necessary to prevent Intra site and Inter site sectors interference and saturation assuming that all sectors are operating with the same frame size and with the same DL UL ratio The GPS clock required is 1PPS with accuracy of 10 and maximum jitter of 100ns These GPS clock requirements can be reached by indoor or outdoor installed GPS unit when it is synchronized to at least 4 satellites Two types of GPS Receivers are available from Alvarion HM Indoor GPS Receiver with an outdoor antenna HM Outdoor GPS Receiver A GPS Adapter is required to provide the interface between the NPU and the GPS Receiver Indoor GPS Receiver The Indoor GPS Receiver comprises a GPS receiver integrated with a stable OCXO oscillator within a unit designed for mounting in a standard 19 inch rack An up to 50 meter coaxial cable connects it to an active antenna The indoor installed GPS system is able to provide up to 40 hours of clock holdover with a maximal drift of 50 microseconds when the GPS system losses satellites synchronization The Indoor GPS provides 1PPS at TTL levels and the control channel is driven by an RS 232 serial interface The unit is powered directly from a 48 VDC power source Outdoor GPS Receiver The al
280. switch over V5 2 to Alvarion s SIP stand alone Voice Gateways VG 1D1V and VF 1D2V or Voice Gateway IDUs IDU 1D1V and IDU 1D2V A Local Exchange LE with the DUET 6004 support basic and advanced telephony services as CLASS services IN services and others The DUET can be either collocated with the BreezeMAX Base Station or installed at the LE premises concentrating the traffic of many Base Stations The LE switch provides the call processing billing and administrative functions while the DUET provides the signaling translation and media conversion E Signaling Translation converting the V5 2 signaling into SIP commands and vice versa E Media Conversion converting media formats such as PCM to G 729A and others It also provides additional media related services such as Echo Canceling and others E Outbound SIP Proxy The DUET operates as outbound SIP proxy for the Voice Gateways All outbound calls from the user agents are sent to the DUET Note that the DUET does not support SIP to SIP calls and all calls are always passed to the switch via the V5 2 interface E Registration Processing registration requests of the SIP Voice Gateways connected to the BreezeMAX CPE The DUET complies with the V5 2 interface standard second edition and the SIP RFC 3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol making it a certified means to System Description Management Systems provide telephony and advanced services over an IP network It
281. t rate 1280 bits 50 pps Note 1280 bits 160 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call total packet size 1744 bits 50 pps 87 2 Kbps Voice RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 87 2 Kbps is 8 72 Kbps T 38 14 400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth with a 20 msec sample interval is as follows BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 711 Service Profile Be B 5 6 B 5 6 1 B 5 6 2 B 5 6 3 Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 36 bytes 94 bytes Total packet size bits 94 bytes 8 bits per byte 752 bits PPS 14 4 Kbps bit rate 288 bits 50 pps Note 288 bits 36 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call total packet size 752 bits 50 pps 37 6 Kbps As Fax BW is lower than Voice BW the Voice BW requirement mandates the CG connection s attributes This is true for all G 711 codecs FAX RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 37 6 Kbps is 3 76 Kbps QoS Profiles CG QoS for RTP traffic The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 87 2 Kbps equivalent to a Packet Size of 1744 bits or 218 bytes Thus the CG 88 QoS Profile parameters are E Packet Size 218 bytes E Sample Interval 20 msec RT QoS for RTCP and VoIP Signaling The required bandwidth is 10 72 Kbps 8 72 Kbps for Voice RTCP plus 2
282. t to the Internet through a common broadband medium such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem All the users over the Ethernet share a common connection so the Ethernet principles supporting multiple users in a LAN combines with the principles of PPP which apply to serial connections Quadrature Amplitude Modulation A technique used in wireless applications to double the available bandwidth by combining two amplitude modulated signals The two combined signals differ in phase by 90 degrees this technique doubles the bandwidth by combining the two signals at the source before transmission transmitting digital data at a rate of 4 bits per signal change Quality of Service Measure of performance for a transmission system that reflects its transmission quality and service availability Quadrature Phase Shift Keying A data transfer technique used in coaxial cable networks that sends data using modulating signals Four different phases represent data with each signal s information determined by the signal before it For example if a phase stays the same from one signal to the other the information has not changed Remote Authentication Dial In User Service an authentication and accounting system used by many Internet Service Providers ISPs When you connect to the system you must enter your username and password This information is passed to a RADIUS server which checks that the information is correct and then au
283. terface and VoIP 2V for fully supporting gateways for 2 POTS interfaces Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Devices 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 1 POTS no Fax G 729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval no priority marking 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 1 POTS T 38 Fax G 729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval DSCP priority marking 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 1 POTS no Fax G 711 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval no priority marking 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 711 1 POTS T 38 Fax G 729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval DSCP priority marking For more details of defining Service Profiles for Generic 3rd party VoIP devices refer to Appendix B Except for the Basic PPPoE Internet Access pre configured Service Profiles all pre configured Data Service Profiles use L2 Service Type to ensure transport of all L2 and L3 protocols It is recommended to use the L2 Best Effort Internet Access pre configured Service Profile as the Default Data Service Profile in Quick Mode The following tables provide details on the pre configured Service Profiles Forwarding Rules Priority Classifiers and QoS Profiles Table 4 9 Pre Configured Data Service Profiles Name Service Type VPL ID Forwarding Rule Priority Classifier Internet Access L2 L2 Null Internet Access L2 BE Asymmetric Internet Access PPPoE PPPoE 11 Internet Access PPPoE BE Asymmetric
284. the Management port This parameter does not affect management traffic via the local subnet defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask If remote management for the Management port is disabled then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager A The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters B The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters C Any subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port if Data Port Gateway is defined If remote management is enabled for both the Data Port and the Management port then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager A The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters B The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu Ed 4 5 3 3 4 5 3 3 1 4 5 3 3 2 C Any subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port if Data Port Gateway is defined D The Static Route subnet defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask param
285. the Internet s TCP IP protocols to enable data transfer A 64 Kbps PCM voice coding technique Described in the ITU T standard in its G series recommendations A compression technique that can be used for compressing speech or audio signal components at a very low bit rate as part of the H 324 family of standards This codec has two bit rates associated with it 5 3 and 6 3 Kbps The higher bit rate provides a somewhat higher quality of sound The lower bit rate provides system designers with additional flexibility Described in the ITU T standard in its G series recommendations A compression technique where voice is coded into 8 Kbps streams There are two variations of this standard G 729 and G 729 Annex A that differ mainly in computational complexity both provide speech quality similar to 32 kbps ADPCM Described in the ITU T standard in its G series recommendations Global Positioning System A system that uses satellites receivers and software to allow users to determine their precise geographic position A protocol suite defined by ITU T for voice transmission over internet Voice over IP or VoIP In addition to voice applications H 323 provides mechanisms for video communication and data collaboration in combination with the ITU T T 120 series standards BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Glossary IB IDU IEEE IEEE 802 1p IEEE 802 16 IEEE 802 16e IEEE 802 1Q IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 11b
286. thorizes access to the system BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Glossary RF RFC RoHS RS 232 RS 422 RSA RSSI R amp TTE Radio frequency An AC signal of high enough frequency to be used for wireless communications Request For Comments The name of the result and the process for creating a standard on the Internet New standards are proposed and published on the Internet as a Request For Comments The proposal is reviewed by the Internet Engineering Task Force Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronic equipment reference EC Directive 2002 95 EC of 27 January 2003 A serial interface published by the EIA Electronic Industries Association for asynchronous data communication over distances up to a few hundred feet Characterized by a single ended not differential physical layer it uses one signal wire for transmission another for reception and a common wire ground plus some timing and control signals RS 422 is a serial interface standard in which data is sent ina differential pair two wires or twisted pair cable which allows greater distances and higher data rates than non differential serial schemes such as RS 232 A public key encryption technology developed by RSA Data Security Inc The acronym stands for Rivest Shamir and Adelman the inventors of the technique The RSA algorithm is based on the fact that there is no efficient wa
287. time interval used for measuring average information transfer rates Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses from a pre defined list to nodes on a network Using DHCP to manage IP addresses simplifies client configuration and efficiently utilizes IP addresses A group of subminiature switches mounted in a Dual Inline Package compatible with standard integrated circuit sockets Down Link Disk Operating System Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol Differentiated Service Code Point AKA DiffServ An alternate use for the ToS byte in IP packets Six bits of this byte are being reallocated for use as the DSCP field where each DSCP specifies a particular per hop behavior that is applied to the packet See DSCP Data Loss Indicator Excess Information Rate Specifies the excess rate above the committed rate of information that can be available to a user The EIR is used by the traffic policing mechanism to prevent users from sending excess traffic to the network EIR MIR CIR Equavalent Isotropic Radiated Power The apparent power transmitted towards the receiver if it is assumed that the signal is radiated equally in all directions The EIRP is equal to the power in dBm at the antenna port plus the power gained from the directivity of the antenna in dBi Electro Magnetic Compatibility The capability of equipment or systems to be used in their intended environment within designed
288. timing parameters should be adapted to the largest expected delay which is determined from the distance from the uBST of the farthest SU served by it NOTE For Non Line Of Sight NLOS links using refractions the cell distance should be higher than the line of sight distance Typically a 10 margin is a good estimate for the increase in distance due to the NLOS operation The basic time element symbol used by a system operating in TDD mode is 68 microseconds for a bandwidth of 3 5 MHz and 50 microseconds for a bandwidth of 5 MHz This symbol size is translated to a round trip delay of approximately 20 km for 3 5 MHz bandwidth and 15 km for 5 MHz bandwidth or a cell radius of 10 km or 7 5 km respectively NOTE An SU located at a distance larger than the Maximum Cell Radius will be rejected during the network entry process The values range for the Maximum Cell Distance is from 10 to 50 km fora bandwidth of 3 5 MHz and 7 to 45 km for a bandwidth of 5 MHz representing a maximum delay of 6 symbols NOTE The actual value that the system will use is a multiple of the the one way delay for a single basic time element N 10 km for a bandwidth of 3 5 MHz or N 7 5 km for a bandwidth of 5 MHz where N is a an integer from 1 to 6 The value configured for the Maximum Cell Radius will be up rounded to the nearest applicable value The read only Actual Maximum Cell Radius km parameter in the Show option is the actual value used by the AU
289. ubmitted E CIR Utilization The CIR utilization measured for an RT or NRT connection over the last 15 seconds Not applicable for BE and CG connections k 100 x the minimum between bytes transferred and CIR CIR is calculated for each 1 second interval CIR Utilization equals the average of k over the last 15 seconds and may vary from 0 to 100 The value is updated every 15 seconds E EIR Utilization Excess Information Rate utilization measured for a BE or NRT connection over the last 15 seconds Not applicable for RT and CG connections k 100 x bytes transferred CIR MIR CIR is calculated for each 1 second interval In BE CIR 0 The EIR Utilization equals the average of k over the last 15 seconds and may range from O to 100 The value is updated every 15 seconds E Average Throughput bits s The average throughput in bits second measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds Service Profiles Each Service Profile defines the properties of the defined service Each Service Profile is associated with specific Forwarding Rule and Priority Classifier Priority Classifiers are not applicable to Voice Service Profiles The Service Profile menu enables viewing all Service Profiles in the database defining new Service Profiles editing details of previously defined Service Profiles and removing Service Profiles from the database The Service Profiles database can hold u
290. uency BST AU ID BST AU ID Mask Best BST AU Table includes details of all applicable BST AUs BST AU ID Downlink Rx Frequency SNR dB Rx Antenna 4 9 6 2 Unit Control The SU Unit Control menu enables defining the SU s status resetting the SU and managing the SW versions of the unit The Unit Control menu includes the following options E Status M Reset E Set Factory Defaults HM SW Version Control 4 9 6 2 1 SU Status The SU Status parameter enables defining the status of the SU which determines the services it can receive The available options are 1 Permanent 2 Temporary 138 Operation and Administration SU Menu 4 9 6 2 2 4 9 6 2 3 4 9 6 2 4 4 9 6 2 5 NOTE An SU that is defined as Temporary will be deleted from the database when it is disconnected Reset Unit Select this option to reset the unit To avoid unintentional reset you will be prompted to confirm the reset request Changes to some of the configurable parameters are applied only after reset Refer to Section 4 11 for information on which parameters are changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset Set Factory Defaults Select this option to set the SU parameters to their factory default values Refer to Section 4 11 for information on the factory default values of these parameters The parameters will revert to their default values after the next reset SW Versions Control only f
291. ult SW File Advanced Si E Name E Action BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 55 i Jul 3 2 1 Operation Verification The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the Outdoor Units Indoor Units Ethernet connection and data connectivity AU ODU LEDs To verify the correct operation of the AU ODU examine the LED indicators located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications NOTE Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs as described below is only possible after the configuration of basic parameters has been completed Table 3 2 AU ODU LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Power indication E Off Power failure E Green Power to ODU is OK internal 3 3 VDC power supply is OK ALARM IDU ODU communication and Mi Off IDU ODU communication is OK synthesizer is locked synthesizer status indication E Red IDU ODU communication failure or synthesizer is not locked ETH Not Used Operation Verification 32 2 Micro Base Station LEDs To verify the correct operation of the Micro Base Station equipment examine the LED indicators located on the front panel of the unit The following table lists the LEDs of the Micro Base Station and their associated indications Table 3 3 Micro Base Station LEDs Name Description F
292. ult gateway Refer to the limitations described in IP Addresses Configuration on page 65 except to the default 0 0 0 0 address that is permitted as it means no gateway Managemen Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet as The Destination Subnet parameters define a Static Route which is an IP subnet of stations that can manage the device when connected via a router to the Management port The Static Route is applicable only when remote management is enabled for both the Management and Data ports i e when both Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable and Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameters are set to Enable If OOB management via a router connected to the MGMT port is used the parameters should be configured to ensure different subnets for the Data port the Management port and the Management Port Destination Subnet The default is 0 0 0 0 for both parameters meaning no Static Route In a binary representation 32 bits the subnet mask must comprise a series of contiguous binary 1 s starting from the MSB followed by a series of contiguous binary O s NOTE The Management Port Gateway Destination Subnet and Destination Subnet Mask are grouped together Exiting the configuration process e g by pressing the Esc key after configuring just the first one or two parameters in this group will discard the changes made The subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via th
293. unctionality PWR Power indication E Off Micro Base Station is not powered E Red Input power failure E Green Micro Base Station power is OK ALRM Micro Base Station alarm M Off Micro Base Station is OK indication E Red Micro Base Station failure SP Spare Not Used EXT ALRM External alarm indication Red External alarm received via the ALRM IN port Not applicable in the current release WACT IDU transmission E Off No IDU transmission indication E Green IDU transmission OK WLINK Wireless link status E Off No SU is associated indication E Green At least one SU is associated ODU1 0DU4 PWR IDU to ODU Power E Off No IDU to ODU power output Indication E Red IDU to ODU power output failed E Green IDU to ODU power output OK ODU1 ODU4 ALRM IDU ODU communication E Off IDU ODU communication OK status E Red IDU ODU communication failure BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual Chapter 3 Commissioning 3 2 3 GPS Adapter LEDs To verify the correct operation of the GPS Adapter examine the LED indicators located on the front panel of the unit The following table lists the LEDs of the GPS Adapter and their associated indications Table 3 4 GPS Adapter LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Input power indication E Off Power input failure E Green 12 VDC power supply from NPU is OK 1PPS 1PPS signal indication E Blinking Green 1PPS signal from GPS Receiver is detected E Re
294. ure marrnnrnnnnnnnnvnnnnrnrrnnnnrnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnernnnnnnnnrnrrnnnennnnnnn 4 Micro Base Station Unit anasudnemmmsml nmpueneavdnitdaneniaabnkenimar 5 4 sectors configuration frequency reuse 1 rrsnnnnnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnvnvnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnerennnnnnnenen 7 4 sectors configuration frequency reuse 1 2 rrnrrnrrrrrvrvrrvrrrrrrrrrrerrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrernn 7 One sector configuration with second order diversity ccescceeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 8 One sector configuration with fourth order diversity rnrrrrnnvrnnrnrnrrrnnnennrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnn 8 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP Pole Installation Using Special Clamps oorrrrrrnennnnrnre 31 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP Pole Installation Using Metal Band ernvrnnnonrnrrnnnnonnnnn 32 Bottom Panel of the 2 x 3 x GHz AU ODU HP except 2 3 GHz WCS J rrrnrrrnnrrrn 33 Bottom Panel of the AU ODU HP 2 3 GHZ WCS resnnronnnrnnnvnnnrrrrrrnnnrenrnnnrrnnvennrnenr 33 Micro Base Station Front Panel rrnanonnnrsnrnnnnnnrnrrnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnannnennnennnn 36 SE ER 43 rer ep Rear Panel n mmumseesr seerenrrrrrnsnserersosnrrnssssnnnrvnvrnsnnanonsnnnersenrenennnnnensene 43 gele a csctecnseseenasdecc ent intad dhastiassndoneeresaes naetereennnnedy Aecediendexs 165 Tables Table 1 1 Radio Specifications eerrnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnrnavennnnnnnnennannnnnnnannannnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnne 14 Table 1 2 Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Electrical Spe
295. values 1 to 65535 The default value is 1813 RFC 2866 requirement BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 109 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 7 3 2 3 Server Status Defines whether this server is Primary or Secondary Each Accounting server can 4 5 7 3 3 110 be defined as either Primary or Secondary Only one Accounting server can be defined as Primary Select Server This option enables selecting an existing Accounting for viewing its status and parameters deleting it from the database or viewing its Statistics counters The selection is based on the server s IP address The available options are E Show Displays current status and parameters For information on displayed details refer to Section 4 5 7 3 1 Delete To delete the server from the database E Statistics To display or reset the Statistics Counters for this server The Statistics Counters display traffic information according to the standard RFC 2620 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB as follows Round Trip Time The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from this server Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this server Retransmissions include retries where th
296. ve Transmit A unit for measuring the height in rack cabinets 1U 1 75 inches User Datagram Protocol Connectionless transport layer protocol in the TCP IP protocol stack UDP is a simple protocol that exchanges datagrams without acknowledgments or guaranteed delivery requiring that error processing and retransmission be handled by other protocols UDP is defined in RFC 768 Up Link Coordinated Universal Time The reference for the official time used by all countries in the world and it is independent from the time zones The modern implementation of Greenwich Mean Time Virtual Local Area Network A group of devices on one or more LANs that are configured with the same VLAN ID so that they can communicate as if they were attached to the same wire when in fact they are located on a number of different LAN segments Used also to create separation between different user groups Very Large Scale Integration The process of placing thousands or hundreds of thousands of electronic components on a single chip Voice over Internet Protocol Provides an advanced digital communications network that bypasses the traditional public switched telephone system and uses the Internet to transmit voice communication VoIP enables people to use the Internet as the transmission medium for telephone calls by sending voice data in packets using IP rather than by traditional circuit switched transmissions of the PSTN Virtual Private Link A virtual c
297. wer of the ODU associated with Channel 2 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1 Channels 3 and 4 are not used in Second Order Diversity Mode The Show menu includes also the following read only parameters E Tx Power The Tx Power of the Associated ODU If the actual value differs from the configured one both values will be displayed starting with the configured value E Associated Radio Cluster As configured in the Associated ODU E Uplink Rx Frequency Computed from the configured Downlink Tx Frequency according to the Duplex Separation of the applicable Frequency Band In TDD systems the Uplink Tx Frequency is the same as the Downlink Tx Frequency E Frequency Band The ODU Frequency Band If there is a mismatch between the Configured ODU Frequency Band and its actual band both values will be displayed E Operational Status Multirate Parameters BreezeMAX employs a multirate algorithm to dynamically adapt the modulation scheme and Forward Error Correction FEC coding to actual link conditions The algorithm is managed by the Micro Base Station taking into account also information received from the served SUs Optimal values are calculated separately for the uplink and downlink for each SU MAP messages transmitted to Operation and Administration Access Parameters Menu the SUs include information on the uplink rate that should be used by each SU for its next transmiss
298. wnlink QoS profiles can be assigned to each Service The data will be mapped onto these connections by either IEEE 802 1p or DSCP priority tags This will lead to creation of the corresponding number of Uplink and Downlink connections supporting differentiated services to up to 4 applications based on either IEEE 802 1p or DSCP prioritization schemes In cases where prioritization is not used a single pair of uplink downlink connections is created Forwarding Rules A Forwarding Rule is assigned to each Service defining various features that define the handling of certain message types in the wireless domain These features that define the wireless broadcast domain for Operation and Administration Services Menu 4 10 1 2 4 10 1 2 1 4 10 1 2 2 all Services that use the Forwarding Rule include Unicast and Broadcast relaying QoS Profile for Multicasts and Unknown Address Forwarding Policy The available features depend on the Service Type E Aggregation Several Services in the Wireless Domain may be aggregated into a single Virtual Private Link VPL in the backbone domain E Priority Marking Ethernet frames transmitted to the backbone may be marked with a configurable priority DSCP or IEEE 802 1p enabling the upstream network to handle the traffic accordingly HM Auto configuration The Ethernet Addresses of the Subscribers PCs are automatically learnt just as in a standard Bridge For each Ethernet Address it also le
299. x5 2 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female BS ANT 90 2 X DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 100x12x5 2 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female BS ANT 120 2 X DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 100x17x9 5 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female 24 System Description Specifications 1 5 10 5 3 x GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications Table 1 14 Micro Base Station 3 x GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications Unit Description Dimensions cm Weight kg BS ANT 60V 3 3 3 8 Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 76 6 X 15x 8 7 2 2 Connector N Type female BS ANT 90V 3 3 3 8 Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 76 6 x 15 x 8 6 2 2 Connector N Type female BS ANT 120V 3 3 3 8 Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 76 6 x 14 4 x 8 3 2 0 Connector N Type female BS ANT 60 3 5H Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 50x20x2 8 2 Connector N Type female BS ANT 90 3 5H Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 60 x 25 x 5 5 2 Connector N Type female BS ANT 65 3 5 DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 85 1 x 16 x 6 1 2 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female BS ANT 90 3 5 DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 85 1 x 16 x 6 1 2 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female BS ANT 120 3 5 DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 68 8 x 16 x 14 5 2 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female Omni ANT 3 4 3 6 Mounting bracket up to 50 mm pole 67 5 tubular 8 diameter 0 29 Connector N Type female BreezeMAX Micro Base
300. y The Severity menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Severity that differs from the default severity updating the Severity of a selected trap and restoring the Severities of all traps to the default severities The Severity menu includes the following options E Show Traps with Modified Severity Displays all traps with Severity that differs from the default severity E Update Enables modifying the Severity of a selected trap E Restore Defaults Enables restoring the Severities of all traps to the default severities Suppression Interval The Suppression Interval is the minimum time between consecutive transmissions of the same trap This parameter can be used to prevent excessive retransmissions of the same trap The Suppression Interval menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Suppression Interval that differs from the default suppression interval updating the Suppression Interval of a selected trap and restoring the Suppression Intervals of all traps to the default value of 0 no suppression The Severity menu includes the following options E Show Traps with Modified Suppression Interval Displays all traps with Suppression Interval that differs from the default suppression interval which is O no suppression Operation and Administration Micro Base Station Menu 4 5 5 4 5 5 1 4 5 5 1 1 E Update Enables modifying the Suppression Interval of a selected trap The available range is from 0 to 86
301. y to factor very large numbers Deducing an RSA key therefore requires an extraordinary amount of computer processing power and time The RSA algorithm has become the de facto standard for industrial strength encryption especially for data sent over the Internet Received Signal Strength Indicator A signal or circuit that indicates the strength of the incoming received signal in a receiver Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment The R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC governs the marketing and use of R amp TTE equipment With the exception of a few categories of equipment the Directive covers all equipment which uses the radio frequency spectrum It also covers all terminal equipment attached to public telecommunication networks BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 249 Glossary RT RTCP RTP SIP SLA SME SNAP 250 Real Time Real Time service is designed to meet the needs of Real Time Variable Bit Rate RT VBR like services characterized by requirements for guaranteed rate and delay such as streaming video or audio These services are dynamic in nature but offer periodic dedicated requests opportunities to meet real time requirements Because the subscriber equipment issues explicit requests the protocol overhead and latency is increased but capacity is granted only according to the real needs of the connection Service parameters include CIR and CT RTP Control Protocol A protocol that mo
302. ying VLAN membership information A Local Area Network protocol suite commonly known as Ethernet Ethernet uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access bus with Collision Detection CSMA CD This method allows users to share the network cable However only one station can use the cable at a time A variety of physical medium dependent protocols are supported The IEEE 802 11b also referred to as 802 11 High Rate or Wi Fi An extension to 802 11 standard for wireless Ethernet networks that applies to wireless LANS and provides 11 Mbps transmission with a fallback to 5 5 2 and 1 Mbps in the 2 4 GHz band BreezeMAX Micro Base Station System Manual 243 Glossary IEEE 802 11g IETF IF IP IPsec ISP ITU T 244 An extension to 802 11 standard for wireless Ethernet networks that applies to wireless LANs and provides 20 Mbps in the 2 4 GHz band Internet Engineering Task Force One of the task forces of the IAB Internet Architecture Board formally called the Internet Activities Board which is the technical body that oversees the development of the Internet suite of protocols commonly referred to as TCP IP The IETF is responsible for solving short term engineering needs of the Internet Intermediate Frequency Radio communications systems modulate a carrier frequency with a baseband signal in order to achieve radio transmission In many cases the carrier is not modulated directly Instead a lower IF signal is modulat

BreezeMAX Micro BST, Ver.4.2 TDD - System Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents